Manual Manifold MPD FULL

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 281

MPD-READY®

OPERATING, MAINTENANCE, and


SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

CANDOC MPD MANUAL COPYRIGHT © 2016 CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD.


S/N MPD-005 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Canrig Drilling Technology Ltd.

Printed in the United States of America


Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview...................................................................................................... 1-1

Scope ........................................................................................................... 1-1

Conventions ................................................................................................ 1-2

Illustrations.................................................................................................... 1-2

Safety Requirements .................................................................................. 1-2

Personnel Training and Equipment Service ............................................. 1-3

Recommended Tools ................................................................................. 1-3

General System Safety Practices.............................................................. 1-4

Replacing Components ............................................................................ 1-4

Routine Maintenance ................................................................................ 1-4

Ordering Parts ............................................................................................. 1-5

Chapter 2: General Information


System Overview ........................................................................................ 2-1

Manifold Components ............................................................................... 2-2


Choke Assembly .............................................................................................. 2-4
Gate Valve Assembly...................................................................................... 2-5
Electronic Actuator .................................................................................. 2-6
Sensors............................................................................................................... 2-8
Temperature Sensor.................................................................................. 2-9

Flow Sensor ................................................................................................ 2-9

Pressure Sensor .......................................................................................... 2-9

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. i


Manifold Specifications ........................................................................... 2-10

Sensor Settings .......................................................................................... 2-11

Communication and Power ................................................................... 2-12

Chapter 3: Installation
Lifting Instructions........................................................................................ 3-1

Manifold Installation ................................................................................... 3-3


Installation Clearances ....................................................................................3-4

Electrical Installation................................................................................... 3-5

Chapter 4: Operation
Operation: Powering up the System ........................................................ 4-1

Operation: Switches on outside of the cabinet...................................... 4-1

Lock Out/Tag Out....................................................................................... 4-3


PLC Cabinet Switch..........................................................................................4-3

Electronic Valve Actuator ......................................................................... 4-4


Electronic Valve Actuator Display Screen.....................................................4-5
Display — Home Screen Selection .................................................................4-6
Temporary Home Screen display:............................................................4-6

Permanent Home Screen Display............................................................4-6


Torque Position and Indication .......................................................................4-7
Display Status Indication — Travel ...........................................................4-8

Display Status Indication — Control ........................................................4-9

Display Status Indication — Alarms..........................................................4-9

Battery Alarm ...........................................................................................4-10

Manual Operation of the Choke............................................................ 4-11

Manual Operation of the Valve Actuator............................................. 4-12

Chapter 5: Maintenance
Choke Maintenance.................................................................................. 5-1

ii Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Notes Regarding the Electric Actuated Choke ........................................... 5-1
Troubleshooting the Choke ............................................................................ 5-2
Choke Maintenance....................................................................................... 5-2
Seat Removal ................................................................................................... 5-7
Seat Insertion .................................................................................................... 5-8
Gate Removal/Reversal.................................................................................. 5-9
Changing the Assembly Pin.......................................................................... 5-10
Rotating the Detachable Nose.................................................................... 5-11
Replacing the Wear Sleeves ........................................................................ 5-12
Replacing the Packing or Bonnet O-Ring................................................... 5-13
Choke Bonnet Assembly ............................................................................... 5-14
Choke Body Assembly................................................................................... 5-16
Actuator Removal and Replacement ........................................................ 5-17
Gantry Maintenance .................................................................................... 5-19
Installation:............................................................................................... 5-21

Maintenance:.......................................................................................... 5-21

Tools Required for Servicing the Gantry ............................................... 5-21

Disassembly of the Gantry Assembly:................................................... 5-22

Disassembled Inspection: ...................................................................... 5-23

Assembly of the Gantry:......................................................................... 5-23

Mounting the Gantry to the Choke —


Adjustment of the Bonnet Hanger ........................................................ 5-26

Gate Valve Maintenance ....................................................................... 5-27


Gate Valve Components ............................................................................. 5-27
Replacing Leaking Stem Packing ................................................................ 5-31
Replacing the Gate ...................................................................................... 5-32
Lubrication Instructions.................................................................................. 5-33
Types of Grease ............................................................................................. 5-33
Greasing the Handwheel.............................................................................. 5-33
Body Cavity Lubrication................................................................................ 5-34
Gate Valve Stem Lubrication ....................................................................... 5-35
Actuator Lubrication ..................................................................................... 5-35
Lubricating Oil ................................................................................................ 5-35
Food Grade Lubricating Oil................................................................... 5-36

Grease (Linear Drive Unit) ...................................................................... 5-36

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. iii


Grease (Base Assembly) .........................................................................5-36

Inverted Installation .................................................................................5-36


Actuator Controls ...........................................................................................5-37
Specifications ...........................................................................................5-37

Health and Safety....................................................................................5-37


Special Conditions..........................................................................................5-39
Actuator Bluetooth Setting Tool (BTST) .........................................................5-40
BTST Controls .............................................................................................5-41
Replacing the Actuator Setting Tool Batteries ............................................5-42
Connecting to the Actuator using the BTST.................................................5-43
Security (Actuator Password) ........................................................................5-44
Electronic Valve Actuator Menus.................................................................5-47
Basic Settings - Limits ...............................................................................5-48

Close Settings ...........................................................................................5-49

Open Settings...........................................................................................5-50

Torque Switch Bypass: .............................................................................5-50


Torque and Position Monitoring ....................................................................5-50
Instructions for Safe Selection, Installation, Use, Maintenance
and Repair:......................................................................................................5-52
Electronic Valve Actuator .............................................................................5-53
Actuator Maintenance..................................................................................5-54
Approved Fuses .......................................................................................5-54

Vibration, Shock and Noise ....................................................................5-54

Conditions of Safe Use for Actuators.....................................................5-54

Replacing the Actuator Battery.............................................................5-56


Battery Replacement Procedure .................................................................5-57
Disassembling the Actuator ..........................................................................5-58
Preparing the Drive Bush (IQ Base-- All Sizes, Types A and Z3) ...........5-58
Disassembling the Bearing (All Sizes) ............................................................5-59
Reassembly .....................................................................................................5-61
Non-Thrust Base (Type B)................................................................................5-61
All Sizes ......................................................................................................5-61

Removal (Type B3 and B4) .....................................................................5-62

Removal (Type B1)...................................................................................5-62

iv Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Mounting the Actuator ................................................................................. 5-63
Rising Stem Valves (Top Mounted) ....................................................... 5-64

Fitting Thrust Base to Valve Actuator .................................................... 5-64

Valve with Gearbox (Side Mounting)................................................... 5-66

Non-Rising Stem Valves (Top Mounting) .............................................. 5-66


Handwheel Sealing ....................................................................................... 5-66
IQM Modulating Actuators .................................................................... 5-66

IQL & IQML Adjusting Linear Stroke....................................................... 5-67


Removing Terminal Cover ............................................................................ 5-68
Cable Entry ..................................................................................................... 5-69
Connecting to Terminals ............................................................................... 5-70
Terminal Block Layout............................................................................. 5-71

Earth/Ground Connections ................................................................... 5-72


Replacing Terminal Cover ............................................................................ 5-72
Commissioning (Basic Settings) .................................................................... 5-72

Sensor Maintenance ................................................................................ 5-73


Sensor Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 5-73
Connection Instructions ................................................................................ 5-75
Setting Units .................................................................................................... 5-80
Setting Damping Value................................................................................. 5-81
Setting Range Values .................................................................................... 5-82

Disassembling/Assembling dpFlow Transmitters.................................... 5-87


Disassembly .................................................................................................... 5-88
Assembly Instructions:.................................................................................... 5-91

Storage Information ................................................................................. 5-94


Long-term Storage......................................................................................... 5-94
Storage Information....................................................................................... 5-94
Actuator Storage ........................................................................................... 5-94
Environmental ................................................................................................ 5-95

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. v


Chapter 6: Parts

Chapter 7: Certifications

Chapter 8: Reference

vi Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


1
Introduction

Overview
This manual consists of the following sections:

• Chapter 1: General Information: This chapter contains an introduction to the contents of the
manual itself, including conventions used throughout the manual, safety information, and
parts ordering information.

• Chapter 2: Product Overview: This chapter provides a description of the product and its major
components.

• Chapter 3: Installation Procedure: This chapter contains general setup and installation
instructions.

• Chapter 4: Operations: This chapter contains information about operating the equipment.

• Chapter 5: Maintenance and Troubleshooting: This chapter contains maintenance,


lubrication, troubleshooting, shipping, and storage information.

• Chapter 6: Parts: This chapter includes the bills of materials and schematics for the equipment.

• Chapter 7: Certifications: This chapter contains certification documents for the equipment.

• Chapter 8: Reference: This chapter contains third-party reference documentation for the
equipment.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 1-1


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Scope
• This manual contains information for the installation, operation, and maintenance of the
Canrig MPD-READY® System. This manual reflects the best practices and knowledge of the
product at the time as originally built and may or may not include subsequent improvements.
For post-production information, contact RIGLINE 24/7™ to receive the latest product
bulletins and alerts.

Conventions
Notes, cautions, warnings, safety and stop messages are used throughout this manual to provide
readers with additional information, and to advise the reader to take specific action to protect
personnel from potential injury or lethal conditions. They are also used to inform the reader of
actions necessary to prevent equipment damage. Please pay close attention to these notices.

This symbol indicates that a notice contains a stop message. A stop message
indicates that a particular action is dangerous and should never be taken, being
likely to cause damage or injury to personnel, property, or equipment.

This symbol indicates that a notice contains a warning message. A warning


message indicates that a particular action is likely to cause injury to personnel.

This symbol indicates that a notice contains a caution message. A caution


message indicates that a step is critical and can result in catastrophic error/data
loss or equipment damage if the step is not carefully followed.

This symbol indicates that a notice contains a safety message. A safety message
indicates that a particular action is highly recommended from a safety
standpoint, such as holding a toolbox talk (TBT) or following a job safety analysis
(JSA) prior to beginning a procedure.

This symbol indicates that a notice contains a note. A note gives the readers
useful information about a certain item.

Illustrations
Figures provide a graphical representation of equipment, equipment components, software
screens and windows. Figures are used in identifying parts, screens and windows, or establishing
nomenclature, and may or may not be drawn to scale.

1-2 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Introduction

Safety Requirements
Canrig equipment is installed and operated in a controlled drilling rig environment involving
hazardous situations. Proper maintenance is important for safe and reliable operation.
Procedures outlined in Canrig manuals are the recommended methods of performing operations
and maintenance.

Caution!
Ensure that personnel are clear of the work
area before performing dangerous tasks.

Wear personal protection equipment including


hard hat, safety glasses, and safety boots
when using this equipment.

Read all warning and caution tag information


provided for safe operation.

Personnel Training and Equipment Service


All personnel performing installation, operations, repair, or maintenance procedures on the
equipment, or those in the vicinity of the equipment, should be trained on rig safety, tool
operation, and maintenance to ensure their safety.

Caution!
Do not operate this equipment without proper
training or protective gear.

Contact the Canrig training department for more information about equipment operation and
maintenance training.

Recommended Tools
Service operations may require the use of tools designed specifically for the purpose described.
Canrig recommends that only those tools specified be used when stated. Ensure that personnel

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 1-3


MPD-READY® Product Manual

and equipment safety are not jeopardized when following service procedures or using tools not
specifically recommended by Canrig.

General System Safety Practices


The equipment discussed in this manual may require or contain one or more utilities, such as
electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic, or cooling water.

Caution!
Read and follow the guidelines below before
installing equipment or performing
maintenance to avoid endangering exposed
persons or damaging equipment.

1. Isolate energy sources before beginning work.

2. Avoid performing maintenance or repairs while the equipment is in operation.

3. Wear proper protective equipment during equipment installation, maintenance, or repair.

Replacing Components
Verify that all components (such as cables, hoses, etc.) are tagged and labeled during assembly
and disassembly of equipment to ensure correct installation.

Replace failed or damaged components with Canrig certified parts. Failure to do so could result
in equipment damage or injury to personnel.

1-4 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Introduction

Routine Maintenance
Equipment must be maintained on a routine basis. See the service schedule for maintenance
recommendations.

Caution!
Failure to conduct routine maintenance could
result in equipment damage or injury to
personnel.

Ordering Parts
When ordering parts, please indicate the following:

• Product Serial Number

• Canrig Part Number and Description

• Assembly/Drawing Number that calls up the appropriate parts

• Quantity

• Required Delivery

For USA and International:


Canrig Drilling Technology
14703 FM 1488
Magnolia, Texas 77354
USA

Phone: 866-433-4345
Fax: 281-259-3222

Email: [email protected]

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 1-5


MPD-READY® Product Manual

This page is left blank to properly sequence this document.

1-6 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


General Information
2
Managed Pressure Drilling (MPD) is an adaptive drilling process used to precisely control the
annular pressure profile throughout the wellbore. The objectives are to ascertain the downhole
pressure environment limits and to manage the annular hydraulic pressure profile accordingly.
MPD-READY® uses sensors, advanced logic, and state-of-the-art hardware to monitor downhole
conditions and react accordingly. Integrated controls are through the NABORS Rigtelligent™
controls.

System Overview

Flare Stack
Mud Bucket

Trip Tanks
Shakers and Pits

6" Trip Tank Return Line


10" Mud Leg to Flowline
Standpipe
Manifold 8" Circulating Line/Vent to MGS
Flow Line
Top Drive

7.5K
4 6" MPD Return Line to MGS/Shakers L

12

11 PSI Choke A
4 FM
4 PSI
FM
13 6"
AT
Fluid
Integrated 10 14 SMGS
15 Level
PSI
in Top Drive
5 VD PSI
T (Optional)
FM 11
9 PSI
8 VD PSI
FM
Choke B 12 13

4-1/16" 5K
MPD Manifold
7,500 psi
Hose 5"

PSI
2 Flow

PSI
PSC PSI
Flow HD BOP Stack
1 6
Mud Pumps 3 (Optional) Rig Choke
Conventional Flare
Manifold Waste Pit Area
Well Control Line

7-1/16" 5K Gate Valve


7

Figure 2-1: System Overview

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 2-1


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Manifold Components

7 10

6 3
5
8
9

Figure 2-2: MPD Manifold (Back). Note: Generic layout depicted; individual configurations may vary. See Chapter 6,
"Parts" for serial-number specific schematics and bills of materials.

No Description No Description
1 Gantry 6 Skid

2 Choke Actuator 7 Pressure Sensor (see Figure 2-8 on


page 2-8 for sensor locations)
3 Choke 8 Lifting Eye
4 Gate Valve 9 Temperature Sensor
5 Gate Valve Actuator 10 Flow Sensor

2-2 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


General Information

4
1
5

Figure 2-3: MPD Manifold (Front). Note: Generic layout depicted; individual configurations may vary. See Chapter 6,
"Parts" for serial-number specific schematics and bills of materials.

No Description No Description
1 Manifold Inlet 4 Remote IO Enclosure
2 Manifold Outlet 5 Transformer
3 Drive Enclosure

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 2-3


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Choke Assembly
The choke is actuated by an electric servo motor that provides linear movement to open and
close the choke with sufficient force to overcome the well fluid load inside of the choke body.

2
5

1 3

Figure 2-4: Choke Assembly

No Description No Description
1 Manual Override 4 Gantry
2 Junction Box 5 Choke
3 Choke Actuator

Choke Actuator: An electromechanical linear actuator built with all steel construction that uses
roller screw technology. The actuator uses an absolute multi-turn feedback encoder, and
parking brake to record and maintain position in the event of work stoppage or shutdown event.
Take special care when lifting this device. Use a lift ring located at the center of gravity. The
actuator has a 2.3" – 3.75" (58 – 96 mm) total travel. The actuator must never reach the end of a
stroke while in service. The actuator weighs 335 lb.

Manual Override: Remove the cap to access the manual override. Use an Allen wrench to move
the actuator by hand in the event of power failure. See “Manual Operation of the Choke” on
page 4-11. Torque cap to 160 ft-lb after use to maintain electrical explosion-proof integrity.

Junction Box: The junction box (J-Box) has a ground lug, feedback and brake, and motor power
connections. The J-Box delivers 480V. Do not open or remove the J-Box until all power sources
have been locked out/tagged out (LOTO). Only qualified personnel should perform maintenance
operations on this equipment.

2-4 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


General Information

Choke: Contains pressure from downhole that is controlled automatically to maintain desired
pressure downhole for wellbore stability. The gate and seat have a double-sided reversible
design that allows the user to extend the life of worn parts by rotating them to the unused side.

Gantry: Suspends the actuator while servicing and allows for the actuator to slide outward and
pivot for service convenience.

Gate Valve Assembly


The gate valve uses a floating slab gate. Upstream and downstream lines seal simultaneously. The
gate has is bi-directional with no need to orient the valve in the line of any one specific direction.
The gate has a non-rising stem, elastomer assisted metal-to-metal sealing at the seat interface
and metal-to-metal stem backseat.

The design also incorporates a de-energizing mechanism by which body cavity pressure
continuously tries to equal the line pressure in bore. At zero line pressure, the gate will hold
approximately 150 psi to 300 psi inside the body cavity. Precaution should be taken to bleed off
this retained pressure by cycling the valve to bleed the body cavity pressure to the line.

1 2

Figure 2-5: Gate Valve Assembly

No Description No Description

1 Electronic Actuator 2 Gate Valve

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 2-5


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Electronic Actuator
The electronic actuator is used for remote actuating of the manifold gate valves.

1 2

4
5 6
Figure 2-6: Rotork Electric Actuator (Front View)

No Description No Description
1 Hand Wheel 4 Motor
2 Oil Plug 5 Base
3 Control Cover 6 Terminal Cover

2-6 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


General Information

2
1 3

6 7 8

Figure 2-7: Rotork Electric Actuator (Top View)

No Description No Description
1 Nameplate 5 Oil Plug
2 Battery Sealing Plug 6 Conduit Entries
3 Display Window 7 Open/Close Selector
4 Hand/Auto Lever 8 Local/Remote/Stop Selector

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 2-7


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Sensors

1 2
2

3
1 2
2

Figure 2-8: Sensor Locations

No Description No Description
1 Pressure Sensor (5 sensors) 3 Temperature Sensor (1 sensor)
2 Flow Sensor (5 sensors)

2-8 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


General Information

Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor is configured at time of manufacture, and does not need further
calibration on site. Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support in the event of error messages, or warning
messages. See “Sensor Troubleshooting” on page 5-73.

Figure 2-9: Temperature Sensor

Flow Sensor
Precision sensors, located upstream and downstream of chokes, measure fluid flow by differential
pressure. These sensors are configured at time of manufacture and do not need further
maintenance on site. In the event of error messages, or warning messages (see “Sensor
Troubleshooting” on page 5-73), contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support. Where available, LCD display
may not be readable and updates will be slower at temperatures below -4° F (-20° C).

Sensor LCD
(Where Available)
Bleed Port
(Normally Closed) L Port Indication on Transmitter
(Red)
Bleed Port
Isolation Port (Normally Closed)
(Normally Open) (Red)
(Blue)

Isolation Port
Equalization Port (Normally Open)
(Normally Closed) (Blue)
(Green)
L Port Indication on Flange

Flow Direction

Figure 2-10: Flow Sensor

Pressure Sensor
Precision sensors, located upstream and downstream of chokes, measure fluid pressure. These
sensors are configured at time of manufacture and do not need further calibration on site. In the
event of error messages, or warning messages (see “Sensor Troubleshooting” on page 5-73),

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 2-9


MPD-READY® Product Manual

contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support. If available, the LCD display may not be readable and updates
will be slower at temperatures below -4° F (-20° C).

Isolation Port
(Normally Open)
Vent Port (Blue)
(Normally Closed)
(Red)

Figure 2-11: Pressure Sensor

Manifold Specifications
Dimensions (LxWxH): 122" x 84" x 82"

Weight: 17,000 lb

Temperature Rating: -20°F to +250°F (-6°C to +121°C) (P+U)

Inlet and Outlet Connection Size:


Outlet: 4" Fig 1002 Male (Wing)

Inlet: 4" Fig 1002 Female (Thread)

Maximum Working Pressure: 5,000 psi (1034 bar)

Choke Trim Size: 3"

Joint Configuration: 4 1/16" RTJ with 316 SS Overlay

Material Class:

Manifold: DD-1.5 NACE MR 0175

Choke: EE-NL NACE MR 0175

Design Code:

Manifold: API 6A, PSL-3, PR-1

Choke: API 16C, PSL-3, PR-2

2-10 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


General Information

Sensor Settings

Table 2-1: Pressure Sensors


Sensor Tag PLC Tag
Manifold Choke Upstream
CHK-A-PIT-001 PT260402 Lower Range Value: 0
CHK-B-PIT-001 FT260406 Upper Range Value: 5000 PSI
CHK-PIT-001 PT260400 Damping Value: 0.1 s
Manifold Choke Downstream
CHK-A-PIT-002 PT260403 Lower Range Value: 0
Upper Range Value: 1000 PSI
CHK-B-PIT-002 FT260407
Damping Value: 0.1 s
Standpipe
SP-PIT-002 PT260505 Lower Range Value: 0 PSI
SP-PIT-003 PT260506 Upper Range Value: 10,000 PSI
SP-PIT-001 PT260603 Damping Value: 0.1 s
RCD
Lower Range Value: 0 PSI
RCD-PIT-001 PT260600 Upper Range Value: 5,000 PSI
Damping Value: 0.1 s

Table 2-2: Differential Pressure Flow Sensors


Sensor Tag PLC Tag

Choke Upstream and


Downstream
CHK-FIT-001 FT260504 Lower Range Value: 0
CHK-A-FIT-001 FT260404 Upper Range Value: 25.244 PSI
CHK-A-FIT-002 FT260405 Damping Value: 0.1 s
CHK-B-FIT-001 FT260500
CHK-B-FIT-002 FT260501

Sensor Tag PLC Tag

Manifold Temperature
Lower Range Value: -50 °F
CHK-TT-001 TT260502 Upper Range Value: 350 °F
Damping Value: 0.1 s

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 2-11


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Table 2-3: Differential Pressure Density Sensors


Sensor Tag PLC Tag

Standpipe dp IN (5" Spool)


Lower Range Value: -5.514 PSI
SP-DIT-001 PT260507 Upper Range Value: 36.113 PSI
Damping Value: 0.1 s
Standpipe dp OUT (4" Spool)
Lower Range Value: -5.514 PSI
CHK-DIT-001 PT260601 Upper Range Value: 36.113 PSI
Damping value: 0.1 s

Communication and Power

DLR2
Rig Sub Remote IO
Main HPU Remote IO
Brake HPU Remote IO
Patch DLR2
DW Remote IO
Panel
Stratix 8000

Ethernet IP Remote IO
Chokes,
Rack Valve Actuators,
and
600 VAC 20A Instrument Sensors
3PH CB 600 VAC
Bucket and Plug
Ethernet IP

MCC
MPD Skid

480 VAC 30A


3 ph CB 480 VAC (Optional)
Bucket and Plug
Driller’s Cabin via Stair Tower
and Festoon

Figure 2-12: Communication and Power Block Diagram

2-12 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


3
Installation

Lifting Instructions
1. When moving the MPD-READY® manifold, use the forklift pockets in the skid for forklift tines.

Figure 3-1: Fully set forklift tines inside forklift pockets prior to moving the MPD manifold

2. Use a 5/8" 4-legged bridle sling (AY23819) that is rated at 8.8 tons. Position strap legs at 30
degrees to vertical and 60 degrees horizontal. See to Figure 3-4 on page 3-2 for leg lengths
(including shackles).

Warning! Shackles must include locking pins secured by means of


a lanyard!

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 3-1


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Route cable underneath


blocks and valves

Leg A = 135" Leg B = 140"

47.25 1200

Leg D = 135" Leg C = 140"

63.75 1619

Figure 3-2: Lifting diagram (top view). Route cables Figure 3-3: Lifting diagram (isometric view).
underneath blocks and valves. Leg lengths include
shackles.

Legs A & D = 135" Legs B & C = 140" Leg D = 135" Leg A = 135"
Leg C = 140" Leg B = 140"

Front
Front View Side View

Figure 3-4: Lifting diagram (front and side view).

3-2 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Installation

Manifold Installation
It is recommended that users position sun shades to protect the actuator from exposure to direct
sunlight for temperatures in excess of 113°F (45°C) to prevent additional temperature increase.

Outlet (Wing)
4" FIG 1002 Male

Inlet (Thread)
4" FIG 1002 Female

Figure 3-5: MPD Manifold Installation

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 3-3


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Installation Clearances
See installation clearances indicated in Figure 3-6.

48.00 [1219]
Minimum
Maintenance
Clearance
Required

11.25 [286]
Minimum 55.00 [1397]
Maintenance Minimum
Clearance Maintenance
Required Clearance
Required
Figure 3-6: Manifold Installation Clearances

3-4 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Installation

Electrical Installation
The MPD manifold has a 600 VAC electrical connection for rig power that feeds into a
transformer. The transformer reduces the voltage to 480V into the enclosure. An optional 480V
connection can be wired directly into the enclosure, bypassing the transformer.

600 VAC Connection

Figure 3-7: MPD Manifold Electrical Connections

Figure 3-8: Servo Drive/Power Enclosure

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 3-5


MPD-READY® Product Manual

This page is left blank to properly sequence this document.

3-6 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


4
Operation

Operation: Powering up the System


1. Connect power.

2. Ensure all circuit breakers are ON.

3. The PLC will complete startup operations within five (5) minutes.

Operation: Switches on outside of the cabinet


Switches on the outside of the PLC Cabinet are used to isolate power sources of the MPD
manifold. See Figure 4-2 on page 4-2. During normal operations, all circuit breakers should be in
the ON state. Use the main switch to power the MPD manifold itself. Valve names are indicated
on the valve itself.

Figure 4-1: Labels on Valve Identify Valve Name

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 4-1


MPD-READY® Product Manual

OFF ON OFF ON

CB1 CB1

VALVE A IN VALVE A OUT


GV-A GV-C

OFF ON OFF ON

CB3 CB4

VALVE B IN VALVE B OUT


GV-B GV-D

Circuit
Breakers OFF ON OFF ON

CB5 CB6

GUTLINE CHOKE A
GV-E SERVO DRIVE

OFF ON OFF ON

CB7 CB8

CHOKE B PLC JBOX


SERVO DRIVE PWR SUPPLY

Figure 4-2: Servo Drive/Power Enclosure

Gutline Valve Valve Valve


(GVE) GV-C GV-D

Choke A Choke B

Valve Valve
GV-A GV-B

A B
Figure 4-3: MPD Manifold Valve Locations

4-2 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Operation

Lock Out/Tag Out


PLC Cabinet circuit breakers and Main Switch have capability to lock out/tag out when in the
OFF position to isolate power.

PLC Cabinet Switch

OFF

OFF ON

ON

480 V
RIG POWER

CB#

Figure 4-4: CB LOTO Figure 4-5: Main Switch LOTO

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 4-3


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Electronic Valve Actuator

Remote
Closed
Stop

Open

Local
For Lock-Out/
Tag-Out (LOTO)
Figure 4-6: Rotork Actuator Local Controls

LOTO Lever: Use a padlock with a 6.5 mm hasp to lock the Control Mode Selector in Local or
Remote Control position.

Left Switch (Valve Command): Momentary switch for valve command to OPEN or CLOSE.

Right Switch (Control Mode Selector): Selector switch for local, stop, or remote operation.

Table 4-1: Electronic Actuator Selector Switches

Icon Name Description

Momentary switch that will fully-close the


Close
gate valve.

Momentary switch that will fully-open the


Open
gate valve.

Prevents electrical operation by Local or


N/A Stop
Remote control.
Turn red selector counter-clockwise (CCW)
to Local position allow adjacent black
Local Control knob to be turned to OPEN or CLOSED
position. Turn red selector clockwise (CW)
to STOP.
Turn red selector clockwise (CW) to
Remote position to allow remote control
Remote Control
signals to operate the actuator. Turn red
selector counter-clockwise (CCW) to STOP.

4-4 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Operation

Electronic Valve Actuator Display Screen


he electronic valve actuator display screen displays the current status of the valve and allows
techncian interface for setting parameters.

10

6
4 8 4
7
1
9
5 3

1. Position Display: Indicates valve position or torque to 1 decimal place.

2. Analog Scale: Displays current torque from 0-100% of rated torque when Analog Torque or
Positioning screens are selected.

3. Infra-red LED: Used for infra-red setting tool, and for initial connection of Bluetooth setting tool.

4. Dual Position LED: Indicates valve position;


Yellow (2): Indicates valve in mid-position.

Green (2): Indicates that valve has reach end of travel.

Red (2): Indicates that valve has reach end of travel.

5. Bluetooth Indication LED: Dual-intensity LED for indicating an active Bluetooth connection.

6. Alarm Icon: Indicates a fault in the valve, control, or actuator. A brief alarm description will be
displayed in a text line above the main display.

7. Battery Alarm Icon: Indicator is displayed upon detection of insufficient battery power.
Battery power is sampled once an hour. A brief message will be displayed in the text line
above the main display, either "Battery Low," or "Battery Discharged."
Battery Low: Indicates that battery power is low, and that the battery should be replaced
soon. See “Replacing the Actuator Battery” on page 5-56.

Battery Discharged: Indicates that the batter power has been depleted, and that the battery
should be replace immediately. See “Replacing the Actuator Battery” on page 5-56.

8. Infra-Red Icon: This indicator flashes during setting tool communication activity. LED will also
flash when keys are pressed.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 4-5


MPD-READY® Product Manual

9. Percentage Open Icon: Indicates that an OPEN value is displayed.

10. Display: The Display is made of two la1yers: an LCD screen, and a dot-matrix display. The
displays are dual stacked for greater flexibility.

Display — Home Screen Selection


The actuator display can be set to show any one of the following home screens:

• Position indication

• Position & Digital Torque indication

• Position & Analogue Torque indication

• Position & Control Demand indication

The default home screen is Position. Home screens indicate the live conditions measured by the
actuator when mains power is applied. When mains power is switched off the actuator battery
powers the display and it will show the position indication display only.

The required home screens can be set by the user either as a permanent display or as a
temporary display for valve or actuator operational analysis.

Temporary Home Screen display:


1. Using the BTST setting tool or the arrow keys, scroll through the available home screens until
the required one is displayed.

2. The selected screen will remain displayed for approximately 5 minutes after the last setting
tool command or until the actuator power is cycled.

Permanent Home Screen Display


1. Using the setting tool, connect to the actuator.

1. From the Settings menu, select Indication, Local Display.

2. From the available settings, select Home Screen.

3. Enter the password if requested.

4. Select Home screen and select the required Home screen for permanent display from the
drop-down list. See Figure 4-7 on page 4-7.

4-6 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Operation

Y Y

Figure 4-7: Rotork Home Screen

5. Home Screen Selection


• Position: Default valve position display. See Figure 4-8 on page 4-7.

• Torque (A) + Pos: Position with analogue torque indication. See Figure 4-9 on page 4-7.

• Torque (D) + Pos: Position with digital torque indication. See Figure 4-10 on page 4-7.

• Positioner: Position with digital and analogue position demand indication. See Figure 4-11
on page 4-7.

Figure 4-8: Position Figure 4-9: Torque (A)+ Position

Figure 4-10: Torque (D) + Position Figure 4-11: Positioner

Torque Position and Indication


Dynamic torque and position values are displayed on the display.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 4-7


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 4-12 shows an actuator at 35% open, producing 27% of the rated torque. The warning
triangle indicates that the actuator has torque tripped.

Figure 4-12: Analog Torque and Position Indication

Figure 4-13 shows an actuator at 35.0% open, producing 27% of rated torque. The status bar and
warning triangle indicate the actuator has torque tripped while closing.

Figure 4-13: Digital Torque and Position Indication

Display Status Indication — Travel


The IQ display provides real-time status indication. The top line of the text area is reserved for
travel status indication. Figure 4-14 shows the travel status example of CLOSED LIMIT.

Figure 4-14: Travel Status Indication, Closed Limit

4-8 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Operation

Display Status Indication — Control


The bottom line of the text area is reserved for control status indication and is displayed for
approximately 2 seconds after the control mode or signal is applied. Figure 4-15 shows the control
status example Remote Control.

Figure 4-15: Control Status Indication, Remote Control

Display Status Indication — Alarms


The IQ display provides alarm indication in the form of text and alarm icons.

There are 2 alarm icons: General, and Battery.

General Alarm:

Battery Alarm:

Figure 4-16: Rotork Alarm Indicators

The general alarm icon will be supported with text in the bottom line indicating the particular
alarm, or if more than one is present, each alarm will be displayed in sequence. Figure 4-17 shows
the status example: TORQUE TRIP CLOSED

Figure 4-17: General Alarm, Torque Trip Closed

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 4-9


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Battery Alarm
The actuator checks the battery level at approximately 1 hour intervals. The battery alarm icon is
displayed when the actuator detects its battery as being low and the display will indicate
BATTERY LOW. If the battery is flat or missing the display will indicate BATTERY DISCHARGED.

When a low or discharged battery alarm is displayed the battery should be replaced
immediately. It is essential that the correct battery type is fitted to maintain actuator certification.
See Table 5-9 on page 5-58.

After replacing a battery the alarm icon will continue to be displayed until the next check and
may take up to 1 hour. Cycling the power will force a battery check and clear the alarm.

Figure 4-18: Battery Alarm, Replace Battery

4-10 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Operation

Manual Operation of the Choke

Feedback Conduit Servomotor


Thread 3/4-14 NPT Conduit Thread
3/4-14 NPT

Green External
Ground Stud

Cap - Remove
for manual drive
access. This
cap must
remain in place
for explosion
proof protection
(2-1/2” AF)

Manual overrride drive


or 8 mm (5/16”) female hex

Figure 4-19: ServoChoke Manual Override & Wiring

1. Located under the cap of the actuator is a manual override feature that allows the user to
manually position the actuator.

2. This feature is designed to be used during setup or in the event the actuator must be used in a
non-powered situation. The cap may be unlocked by loosening the M5 set screw on the cap
flange with a 2.5 mm hex tool, and then removed using the provided flats and a 70mm (2.75")
wrench.

3. The manual override shaft has an 8mm (5/16") female hex.

4. It is best practice to release the brake by applying 24 volts of power before manual indexing
the actuator.

5. It is possible to drive the actuator with the manual override when the brake is applied, but this
will lead to premature wear of the brake device and is not recommended.

Figure 4-20: Manual Override Rotation Direction (CW Open, CCW Close)

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 4-11


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Manual Operation of the Valve Actuator


Use the handwheel to open or close valves during times of power failure.

Caution!
Using additional tools to the handwheel for
more leverage when opening or closing the
valve may cause damage to the valve and/or
actuator, or cause the valve and/or actuator
to become stuck in the seated/backseated
position.

1. Move the Hand/Auto lever into Hand position.

2. Turn the handwheel to engage the clutch.

Figure 4-21: Engaging Manual Operation of the Valve Actuator

3. Release the Hand/Auto lever.

4. Turn the handwheel to adjust the valve position. With sufficient battery power, the display will
show valve position. The handwheel will remain engaged until the actuator is operated
electrically. At that point, the handwheel will automatically disengage and return to motor
drive control.

4-12 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


5
Maintenance

Choke Maintenance

Notes Regarding the Electric Actuated Choke


The gate and seat have a cost saving double-sided reversible design, allowing the user to extend
the life of worn parts by rotating them over to the unused side.

This choke equipment is designed for single and specific flow direction. Never flow through the
equipment backwards.

Never exceed downstream pressure over upstream, as it may result in failure.

When testing gate-to-seat seal, downstream must be open to atmosphere with no pressure build-
up.

Choke must be partially or fully open when hydrotesting complete manifold.

Regular maintenance of the choke will ensure proper operation and service life. Proper
lubrication of all moving and threaded component parts is vital to maintaining dependable
trouble free performance. Disassemble, clean, inspect, and lubricate all moving parts and
bearings after each service job for optimum performance.

For jobs with installations lasting longer than 30 days, it is strongly recommended that field
maintenance be performed. If erosive fluids are flowing through the choke, periodically open the
choke and rotate the nose cone. Rotate/replace the gate and seat, wear sleeves, and seals as
needed.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-1


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Troubleshooting the Choke


Table 5-1: Troubleshooting the Choke
Description Cause Solution
Fluid is coming out of the
The stem packing, nose
weep hole located
o-rings, or bonnet o-rings Change stem packing an o-rings.
directly below the wing
are leaking.
nut.
Change seat and gate. If the ID seals
The trim and/or seat on the nose cone are damaged, this
The choke will not
seals are worn. Nose could also result in failure to hold
provide a positive shut-
cone seals need positive shut-off. Inspect nose cone
off.
replacement. ID seals when removing gate to verify
condition.

Choke Maintenance
Periodically visually inspect the entire choke for evidence of escaping flow media. Check
connections and seal areas.

Check flange gaskets, and bonnet seal, which will be seen escaping through the weep hole
located directly below the wing nut if leaking.

Check plug and gland fitting, and stem packing, which will be seen escaping through the weep
hole located directly below the wing nut if leaking. During normal service rebuilds, inspect all
components for wear, corrosion or damage. Replace as necessary with authentic Canrig parts.

These items can be identified from the Illustrations which are included in this manual. Disassembly
and installation of these items are detailed in this manual.

If extensive repairs are needed, contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support.

5-2 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Parts List
Item Qty Description
1 1 Body
15
2 1 Spool, Outlet
3 1 Carbide, Seat
4
4 2 O-Ring, Seat Seal
5 1 Ring, Seal, Outlet
8
6 1 Fitting, Autoclave 9/16" Gland
7 1 Fitting, Autoclave 9/16" Blind Plug
3
8 2 Ring, B.U. Seat Seal
9 1 Ring, Seal Inlet
4
10 1 Spool, Inlet
6 7 1 11 8 Screw, FHCS
8
12 2 Carbide, Wear Sleeve
13 12 Screw, FHCS
14
14 1 O-Ring, Weather Seal Body
15 1 Asy, Bonnet
9 10 11

12

12

13

Figure 5-1: Choke Parts

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-3


MPD-READY® Product Manual

19

CENTER OF GRAVITY

23

26

24
3

22

5
6

4 11

16

15

17

18

14

10

13

12

19

20

21

25

Figure 5-2: Choke, Cutaway View

5-4 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Item Qty Description


1 1 Actuator, Tolomatic Servochoke
2 1 Adptr, Cx Choke Bonnet Tolomatic Servochoke Motor
3 1 Connector, Cx Model to Tolomatic Servochoke Shaft
4 1 Cap, Packing
5 1 Stem, Non-Shear Gear Operator
6 1 Pin, Assy
7 1 O-Ring, Stem
8 1 Bonnet
9 1 O-Ring, Bonnet Lower Seal
10 1 Ring, B.U. Seal
11 1 Nut, Bonnet
12 1 Guide, Detachable Nose
13 2 O-Ring, Nose/Body Seal
14 2 Ring, B.U. Nose
15 3 Ball, Nylon
16 1 Packing Set
17 1 Guide, Lower Stem
18 3 Screw, Set
19 1 Stem, Adptr Gate
20 1 Ring, B.U. Balance Seal
21 1 O-Ring, Balance Seal
22 12 Screw, FHCS
23 8 Screw, SHCS
24 1 Washer, Wedgelock
25 1 Asy Carbide Gate
26 1 Adptr, Cx Choke Bonnet Tolomatic Servochoke Motor
Figure 5-3: Cutaway View BOM (for Figure 5-2)

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-5


MPD-READY® Product Manual

7
10 6
1 4 2

8 9 5 3

11

13 12

Figure 5-4: Seat Removal Tool (P/N: M19744)

Parts List
Item Qty Description
1 1 Hub, Tool
2 4 Dogs
3 1 Rod, All Thread 1.00-8 UNC x 23.00 LG
4 2 O-Ring, SZ-223
5 1 Body, Tube
6 1 Plate, Face
7 1 Handle, Assy
8 1 Hex Nut, Coupling
9 3 Nut, Hex Jam
10 1 Bearing, Thrust D17
11 1 Pin, Groove Type E 1/4 x 1.25"
12 1 Screw, Set 3/8" 16 UNC x 3/8"
13 1 Ball, Nylon 5/16"

Figure 5-5: Seat Removal Tool BOM

5-6 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Seat Removal
See Figure 5-6 on page 5-9 for seat removal tool references.

Warning!
Bleed all internal pressure before beginning
disassembly process. If proper pressure isolation
valves are not located immediately upstream
and downstream of the choke, the choke trim
cannot be replaced while there is pressure
within the manifold.

1. Turn hex nut coupling (8) counterclockwise until the dogs (2) at the base of the seat removal
tool retract and are flush with the outer diameter.

2. Turn the handle assembly (7) counterclockwise until it is a sufficient distance from the hub end
of the tool to allow full engagement into the seat orifice within the body cavity.

3. Place the seat removal tool in the seat pocket of the body and inside of the seat sliding the
dogs (2) of the seat removal tool past the seat.

4. Crank the hex nut coupling (8) clockwise until it reaches the jam nuts (9) to expand the dogs
(2).

5. Push the face plate (6) into bonnet area and crank the handle assembly (7) clockwise up the
tube body (5) until the seat comes out of the seat pocket.

6. Remove the seat removal tool with the seat attached.

7. Turn the hex nut coupling (8) counterclockwise to release the dogs (2) and remove the seat.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-7


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Seat Insertion
Tools Needed: Grease, soft face hammer, and the seat removal tool. See Figure 5-6 on page 5-9
for seat removal tool references.

Note
In the event that the seat is being turned over
onto the other side, the backup rings and
o-rings should be reversed, as well.

1. Turn hex nut coupling (8) counterclockwise until the dogs (2) at the base of the seat removal
tool are flush with the outer diameter.

2. Slide the seat past the dogs (2) and onto the seat removal tool.

3. Crank hex nut coupling (8) clockwise to expand the dogs (2). The seat should now be secure
on the seat removal tool.

4. Turn the handle assembly (7) counterclockwise until it reaches the top of the jam nuts (9).

5. Grease the seat and seat pocket.

6. Place the seat in the seat pocket of the body using the seat removal tool.

7. Push the face plate (6) into bonnet area and tap the seat removal tool into the body with a
soft face hammer.

8. Turn the hex nut coupling (8) counterclockwise to release the dogs (2).

9. Remove the seat removal tool.

5-8 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Gate Removal/Reversal
See Figure 5-6 on page 5-9 for gate removal tool references.

1
2
3

Parts List
Item Qty Description
1 1 Tool, Gate Removal CXE-II/CX3
2 2 Screw, Hex. Socket Head Cap
3 2 Lock Washer
4 2 Bolt, Shoulder

Figure 5-6: Gate Removal Tool (P/N: M19743)

Caution!
Bleed all internal pressure before beginning
disassembly process. If proper pressure isolation
valves are not located immediately upstream
and downstream of the choke, the choke trim
cannot be replaced while there is pressure
within the manifold.

1. Place the gate removal tool around the large outer diameter of the gate.
2. Tighten the 3/8" hex bolts (2) on both sides of the collar (1).
3. Turn the gate removal tool counterclockwise.
4. Reverse the gate or replace it making sure to anti-seize the threads of the gate adapter stem.
5. Screw the gate onto the gate adapter stem.
6. Turn the gate removal tool clockwise until snug.
7. Remove the gate removal tool.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-9


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Changing the Assembly Pin


Tools Needed: Tools needed: ½" 12 pt wrench, assembly pin (6), punch and hammer. See
Figure 5-1 on page 5-3 and Figure 5-2 on page 5-4 for references.

Caution!
Bleed all internal pressure before beginning
disassembly process. If proper pressure isolation
valves are not located immediately upstream
and downstream of the choke, the choke trim
cannot be replaced while there is pressure
within the manifold.

1. Bring the choke valve to an almost closed position. Note: Do note close the choke
completely. Try to leave a gap between the gate (25) and seat.

2. Unscrew (qty: 6) ½" ferry head cap screws (22) from the bonnet (8) adapter (26).

3. Using the actuator, stroke the choke toward the closed position until the assembly pin (6) is
visible. Caution: Do not over-stroke. In cases where the bonnet assembly is not attached to a
gantry assembly, the bonnet assembly can fall.

4. Use a punch and hammer to knock out the assembly pin (6).

5. Remove the assembly pin (6) from the assembly.

6. Realign the gear operator drive screw and gear operator stem (5).

7. Insert the assembly pin (6). Use a hammer to completely knock the assembly pin into the gear
operator drive screw. Note: Ensure that the pin is fully engaged and not protruding beyond
the flat hex surface on either end. Protruding pins may cause the drive screw to drag and
result in equipment damage or premature failure.

8. Reassemble with the ferry head cap screws (22).

5-10 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Rotating the Detachable Nose


Tools Needed: Tools needed: ½" 12 pt wrench, bonnet wrench (See Figure 5-7). See Figure 5-2 on
page 5-4 for references.

Figure 5-7: Bonnet Wrench (P/N: M19746)

Caution!
Bleed all internal pressure before beginning
disassembly process. If proper pressure isolation
valves are not located immediately upstream
and downstream of the choke, the choke trim
cannot be replaced while there is pressure
within the manifold.

1. Loosen the bonnet nut (11) using the bonnet wrench (See Figure 5-7).

2. Rotate the entire bonnet assembly clockwise (See “Choke Parts” on page 5-3) 1/6 of a turn.
(Note: If the worn area of the detachable nose (12) is still exposed, rotate the entire bonnet
assembly clockwise in increments of 1/6 of a turn until the desired position is reached.

3. Tighten the bonnet nut (11) using the bonnet wrench.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-11


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Replacing the Wear Sleeves


Tools Needed: 7/8" 12 pt wrench, grease, anti-seize lubricant. See Figure 5-1 on page 5-3 for
references.

Caution!
Bleed all internal pressure before beginning
disassembly process. If proper pressure isolation
valves are not located immediately upstream
and downstream of the choke, the choke trim
cannot be replaced while there is pressure
within the manifold.

1. Remove the outlet spool (2) from the body (1) by unscrewing 7/8" ferry head cap screws (13)
with a 7/8" 12 pt wrench.

2. Remove the upper wear sleeve (12) from the outlet spool (2).

3. Remove the lower wear sleeve (12) from the outlet spool (2).

4. Insert the new lower wear sleeve (12) into the outlet spool (2).

5. Insert the upper wear sleeve (12) into the outlet spool (2).

6. Grease seal ring (5) and place into outlet groove of body (1).

7. Fasten outlet spool (2) to the body (1) with the 7/8" ferry head cap screws (13) and a 7/8" 12
pt wrench. Torque evenly to 188 ft-lbs. Note: Make sure to align the top two holes of the outlet
spool with the top two holes of the body.

5-12 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Replacing the Packing or Bonnet O-Ring


Tools Needed: Gate removal tool (See Figure 5-6), 3/16" Allen wrench, strap wrench, 2 small
crescent wrenches, gate stem removal tool (See Figure 5-6). See Figure 5-2 on page 5-4 for
references.

Caution!
Bleed all internal pressure before beginning
disassembly process. If proper pressure isolation
valves are not located immediately upstream
and downstream of the choke, the choke trim
cannot be replaced while there is pressure
within the manifold.

1. Unscrew the gate from the gate adapter stem (19) using the gate removal tool. (See
Figure 5-6).

2. Using Allen wrench to loosen set screws (18).

3. Unscrew detachable nose (12) from bonnet (8) with strap wrench.

4. Unscrew gate adapter stem (19) from gear actuator stem (5) with gate stem removal tool.
(See Figure 5-8).

5. Unscrew (qty: 6) ½" ferry head cap screws (22) from the bonnet (8) adapter (26).

6. Separate the gear actuator stem (5) from the bonnet (8)

7. Unscrew packing cap (4) from the bonnet (8).

8. Replace stem O-ring (7) inside packing cap (4).

9. Replace spring loaded stem seal (16) inside bonnet (8). Note: the direction of the packing is
important for proper operation. For Pressure Energized spring loaded packing, the internal
spring must face the internal pressure of the choke body.

10. Replace O-rings (9, 13, and 21) and backup rings (10, 14, and 20).

11. See “Choke Bonnet Assembly” on page 5-14.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-13


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Choke Bonnet Assembly


Tools Needed: grease, anti-seize lubricant, dead blow hammer, soft wooden dowel, 2 medium
size crescent wrenches, 3/16" Allen wrench, 5/16" Allen wrench, ½" Allen wrench, gate stem
removal tool (See Figure 5-8), and a strap wrench. See Figure 5-2 on page 5-4 for references.

Figure 5-8: Gate Stem Removal Tool (P/N: M19745)

Caution!
Bleed all internal pressure before beginning
disassembly process. If proper pressure isolation
valves are not located immediately upstream
and downstream of the choke, the choke trim
cannot be replaced while there is pressure
within the manifold.

1. Grease bonnet (8) packing box.

2. Grease lower stem guide (17).

3. Press stem guide (17) into bonnet (8) using a dead blow hammer and soft wooden dowel.
(See picture below.)

4. Grease spring loaded stem seal (16) and insert set into bonnet (8). Note: The direction of the
packing is important for proper operation. For Pressure Energized spring loaded packing, the
internal spring must face the internal pressure of the choke body.

5. Grease stem o-ring (7) and place in packing cap (4) taking care not to nick or cut the o-ring
during insertion.

6. Apply anti-seize lubricant to internal threads of bonnet (8) and external threads of packing
cap (4).

5-14 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

7. Screw packing cap (4) into bonnet (8) until snug.

8. Anti-seize lubricate SHCS screws (23) bolt adapter (2) to servo motor (1).

9. Anti-seize lubricate ID of servo motor (1) operating shaft. Also lubricate threads on the
connector hex-head stem (3). Place wedge lock washer (24) over external threads of the
connector hex-stem (3) and screw connector (3) into servo motor (1) operating shaft.

10. Insert backup ring (9) and O-ring (10) onto bonnet. Ensure that the backup ring is above the
o-ring when the bonnet is in an upright position.

11. Grease the bonnet nut (11) bonnet contact area along the inside shoulder of the bonnet nut
and place bonnet nut on bonnet (8).

12. Grease gear operator stem (5) and insert through the top of the bonnet (8) leaving the
assembly pin whole on the tops side of the bonnet.

13. Push the gear operator stem (5) down into the bonnet (8) until the shoulder of the gear
actuator stem meets the top of the bonnet.

14. Apply anti-seize lubricant to the inner diameter threads of gear actuator stem (5) and the fine
threads of the gate adapter stem (19). Screw gate adapter stem into gear operator stem
and tighten with gate stem removal tool (See Figure 5-8).

15. Insert backup ring (20) and O-ring (21) into the inner diameter of the detachable nose (12).
The backup ring should be on the top side of the detachable nose.

16. Insert (qty: 2) o-rings (13) and (qty: 2) backup rings (14) around the grooves of the detachable
nose (12). Each outer diameter groove on the detachable nose should contain a backup
ring and an O-ring. The backup rings should be on the top side of each groove with the
detachable nose in the upright position.

17. Grease inner diameter of detachable nose (12) and outer diameter of bonnet (8). Apply anti-
seize lubricant to inner diameter threads of detachable nose and outer diameter threads of
bonnet.

18. Screw detachable nose (12) onto bonnet (8) and tighten with strap wrench.

19. Place one nylon ball (15) in each of the three set screw holes of the detachable nose (12).

20. Apply anti- seize lubricant to set screws (18) and screw (use 3/16" Allen wrench) into
detachable nose (12).

21. Apply anti-seize lubricant to inner diameter threads of gate (25). (Note: The gate is two sided.)
Grease starting edge of gate and the inner diameter of the nose (12) and screw the gate into
gate adapter stem (19) using the gate removal tool (See Figure 5-6).

22. Place high temperature grease on inner diameter of adapter (26).

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-15


MPD-READY® Product Manual

23. Insert operator stem (5) into the operator drive screw connector from the electric motor (1)
and align with assembly pin (6).

24. Make sure the bonnet assembly is in an open position.

25. Apply anti-seize lubricant to six tapped bolt holes on top of bonnet (8).

26. Install ½" ferry head cap screws (22) onto bonnet (8).

Choke Body Assembly


Tools Needed: grease, anti-seize lubricant, bonnet wrench (See Figure 5-7 on page 5-11), seat
removal tool. See Figure 5-1 on page 5-3 for references.

Caution!
Bleed all internal pressure before beginning
disassembly process. If proper pressure isolation
valves are not located immediately upstream
and downstream of the choke, the choke trim
cannot be replaced while there is pressure
within the manifold.

1. Grease and install seal ring (5) onto the outlet groove of body (1).

2. Grease outlet spool (2) inner diameter and install lower wear sleeve (12) into outlet spool.

3. Install upper wear sleeve (12) into outlet spool (2).

4. Install outlet spool (2) onto body (1) with 7/8" ferry head cap screws (qty:12) (13) and evenly
torque to 188 ft-lbs. Note: Ensure that the outlet spool is two holed onto the body by aligning
the top two holes of the outlet spool with the top two holes of the body bolt pattern.

5. Place (qty: 2) backup rings (8) and (qty: 2) o-rings (4) onto the seat (3). One backup ring and
one o-ring should be in each groove with the backup rings on the downstream side of the
pressure.

6. Install the seat (3) into the body (1).

7. Place weather seal (14) onto body (1).

8. Apply anti-seize lubricant to inlet bolt pattern on body (1) install feral head cap screws (qty: 8)
(11).

9. Grease the inner diameter of the body (1) where the O-rings on the nose cone will seal along
the body wall.

5-16 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

10. Apply anti-seize lubricant to body (1) wing nut threads and install bonnet assembly (15).

11. Tighten with bonnet wrench (See Figure 5-7).

Actuator Removal and Replacement


Tools Needed: 14mm Allen wrench, 2.5mm Allen wrench, high temp grease, anti-seize lubricant,
dead blow hammer, 2 medium size Crescent wrenches, ½” 12 pt wrench, CORTEC assembly pin
(6), punch and hammer.

Refer to Figure 5-2 on page 5-4 and Figure 5-3 on page 5-5 for items described below.

Caution!
Bleed all internal pressure before beginning
disassembly process. If proper pressure isolation
valves are not located immediately upstream
and downstream of the choke, the choke trim
cannot be replaced while there is pressure
within the manifold.

1. REMOVAL OF ACTUATOR. Bring the choke valve to an almost closed position. Note: Do not
close the choke completely. Try to leave a gap between the gate (25) and seat.
A manual override can be accessed on top the actuator by removing the M5 (2.5mm hex) set
screw and the cap with wrench flats. An 8mm (5/16”) female hex will be visible to provide
mechanical method to extend/extract the thrust rod in power off situations. Caution: Do not
exceed 4 ft-lbs on manual hex drive.

Cap must be replaced for explosion proof rating. See Tolomatic manual section on OPERATION
USING MANUAL OVERRIDE FEATURE for details.

2. Unscrew (qty: 6) ½" ferry head cap screws (22) from the bonnet (8) adaptor (26).

3. Using the actuator, stroke the choke toward the closed position until the assembly pin (6) is
visible. Caution: Do not over-stroke. In cases where the bonnet assembly is not attached to a
gantry assembly, the bonnet assembly can fall.

4. Use a punch and hammer to knock out the assembly pin (6).

5. Once the pin (6) is removed unscrew (qty: 6) ½” ferry head cap screws that attach adaptor
(2) and adaptor (26) together. Slide adaptor (26) off of stem connector (3).

6. While holding back up with a crescent wrench on actuator (1) main stem flats to remove
connector (3) use a second crescent wrench on mill flats of connector (3) turning connector
counterclockwise. Wedge lock washer (24) should come off with connector.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-17


MPD-READY® Product Manual

7. Using a 14mm Allen wrench remove (qty: 8) M16 socket head cap screws. Slide off adaptor
(2).

8. Now you are ready to install new actuator.

9. On new/replacement actuator apply anti-seize lubricant to eight tapped bolt holes on


bottom of actuator (1). Grease internal bore of adapter (2). Slide adapter (2) onto actuator
(1).

10. Apply anti-seize lubricant to eight M16 screws (23) install with 14mm Allen wrench into bolt
pattern attaching the actuator (1) and adapter (2) together.

11. Actuator (1) stem must be protruding out far enough pass adapter (2) face to access mill flats
on main actuator stem.

12. Apply anti-seize lubricant to internal threads of main actuator stem and external threads of
stem connector (3). Slide wedge-lock washer (24) over external threads of the connector (3).
While holding back up with a crescent wrench on actuator (1) main stem flats install
connector (3) with washer by using a second crescent wrench on mill flats of connector (3)
turning connector clockwise.

13. Place high temperature grease on ID of adapter (26). Apply anti-seize lubricant to the six ½”
ferry head cap screws (22) install into bolt pattern attaching the actuator adapter (2) and
adapter (26) together.

14. Insert operator stem (5) into the operator drive screw connector (3) from the electric motor
(1) and align the assembly pin (6) hole. Insert the assembly pin (6). Use a hammer to
completely knock the assembly pin into the gear operator drive screw. Note: Insure that the
pin is fully engaged and not protruding beyond the flat hex surface on either end. Protruding
pins may cause the drive screw to drag and result in equipment damage or premature
failure.

15. Make sure the bonnet assembly is in an open position.

16. Apply anti-seize lubricant to six tapped bolt holes on top of bonnet (8).

17. Install ½” ferry head cap screws (22) onto bonnet (8).

18. Actuator replacement complete.

5-18 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


13 6 15 9
27

21 8
B B

17
1

4 3

10
Gantry Maintenance

5 SECTION A-A SECTION B-B


19 7 17 1 16 14
C

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc.


A ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION
6 WASHER,
1 LOCK
1 PLATE,
2 MOUNT GANTRY TOP
1 PLATE,
3 MOUNT GANTRY INNER SWIVEL
1 PLATE,
4 MOUNT GANTRY BOTTOM
4 SCREW,
5 HHCS
3 FITTING,
6 GREASE ZERK
1 7
BRACKET, GANRTY ARM
2 BEARING
8
22 4 9
WASHER, THRUST
10 4 SCREW, HSFHCS, FLAT HEAD, ALLEN
A C 11 1 O-RING, BOTTOM SWIVEL MOUNT
12 1 O-RING, UPPER SWIVEL MOUNT
13 1 O-RING, ADAPTOR, BEARING BONNET HANGER
23 24 25
14 4 SCREW, HHCS
20 15 1 ADAPTOR, BEARING BONNET HANGER
16 1 BRACKET, ASSY GANTRY
17 6 SCREW, HHCS
18 2 SCREW, SHCS

Figure 5-9: Gantry Components


19 1 BRACKET BEARING HANGER
26 20 1 ADAPTOR, NUT HANGER ASY
18 21 1 ADAPTOR BONNET HANGER
22 1 RETAINER, SAFETY PIN
23 4 BOLT, SHOULDER
24 4 BEARING, GANTRY, CX3
25 8 NUT, HEX JAM
6 12 26 4 FITTING, GREASE DRIVE IN TYPE WITH BALL CHECK
27 1 O-RING, ADAPTOR BONNET HANGER
UNLESS OTHERWISED SPECIFIED THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY
MACHINING TOLERANCES OF CORTEC, LLC AND SHALL BE RETURNED REV.
UPON REQUEST. THE DISCLOSURE OR USE OF
ANY PATENTABLE OR PATENTED FEATURES
INCH-X.XX----------.020 IS PROHIBITED. ANY REPRODUCTIONS OF
THIS DRAWING IN WHOLE OR IN PART A
X.XXX--------.005 WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION IS PROHIBITED.
METRIC-X,X-----------0,5
X,XX---------0,10 DRAWN BY DATE TITLE
Courtney Foret 1/21/2019 ASY, GANTRY MDL CX3 CHOKE W/ GEAR
FRACTION-X/XX-------1/16 CHECKED BY
ACT; 2-PC CLAMP TYPE USE FOR
DATE
ELECTRIC SERVO MOTOR
ANGLE TOLERANCE---------1/2 Courtney Foret 1/21/2019
SURFACE FINISH-------125 RMS APPROVED BY DATE DRAWING NO.
10 11 BREAK SHARP EDGES-.015 MAX Lynn Ledet 2/5/2019
SECTION C-C EST. WEIGHT: SHT SCALE
ECN DATE MACHINE FILLET RADII-.015-.050 75Lbs NTS IOM-116
PAGE 8
Maintenance

5-19
5-20
FLOW
MPD-READY® Product Manual

FLOW

Figure 5-10: Gantry Flow Drawing


FLOW
UNLESS OTHERWISED SPECIFIED THIS DRAWING IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY
MACHINING TOLERANCES OF CORTEC, LLC AND SHALL BE RETURNED REV.
UPON REQUEST. THE DISCLOSURE OR USE OF
ANY PATENTABLE OR PATENTED FEATURES
INCH-X.XX----------.020 IS PROHIBITED. ANY REPRODUCTIONS OF
THIS DRAWING IN WHOLE OR IN PART A
X.XXX--------.005 WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION IS PROHIBITED.
METRIC-X,X-----------0,5
X,XX---------0,10 DRAWN BY DATE TITLE
Courtney Foret 1/22/2019
FRACTION-X/XX-------1/16 PROPER MOUNTING POSITIONS
CHECKED BY DATE
ANGLE TOLERANCE---------1/2 OF THE CX3 GANTRY SYSTEM
Courtney Foret 1/22/2019
SURFACE FINISH-------125 RMS APPROVED BY DATE DRAWING NO.
BREAK SHARP EDGES-.015 MAX Lynn Ledet 2/5/2019
EST. WEIGHT: SHT SCALE
ECN DATE MACHINE FILLET RADII-.015-.050 N/A NTS IOM-116A
PAGE 9

Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Installation:
In order to use the gantry system the choke should be installed in line with the flow media coming
into the inlet connection and making a 90 degree turn to pass through the orifice opening in the
seat, and exiting through the outlet connection. The installed orientation of the choke is normally
with the outlet connection horizontal. Other orientations are possible but will not allow the use of
the gantry system. Always install the choke so that it is flowing in the specified direction. (SEE
ILLUSTRATION IOM-116A)

Maintenance:
(Refer to Figure 5-9 on page 5-19.)

• Periodic maintenance of your gantry will insure proper operation and service life.

• There are seven grease points to lubricate to maintain optimal operation of the gantry.

• During normal service rebuilds visually inspect the entire gantry for evidence of corrosion or
damaged components.

• Replace worn components as necessary with authentic CORTEC parts. These items can be
identified on Illustration IOM-116 which is included in this manual.

Tools Required for Servicing the Gantry


• Anti-seize lubricant

• Grease

• Grease gun

• 3/8" Allen wrench

• 1/8" Allen wrench

• Medium Crescent wrench

• Spanner wrench

• Teflon tape

• Grease fitting tool

• Small hammer

• Wrenches: 7/16", 9/16", 1", 1-1/16", 1-1/8"

• 7/16" socket and racket

• Safety glasses

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-21


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Disassembly of the Gantry Assembly:


(Refer to Figure 5-9 on page 5-19.)

1. On the bottom nut hanger clamp (20) remove both socket head cap screws (18) using a 3/8"
Allen wrench by turning them counterclockwise. Set bottom clamp aside.

2. Holding the top nut hanger clamp (20) and use the wrench to separate the adapter bearing
bonnet hanger (15) by turning counterclockwise. Once top nut hanger clamp is unthreaded
place on the side.

3. Next separate adapter bearing bonnet hanger (15) from adapter bonnet hanger (21) by
turning counterclockwise. Remove both thrust washers (9) and bearing (8). Inspect and
replace any damaged parts with genuine CORTEC parts.

4. Remove and inspect O-Ring (27) from adapter bonnet hanger (21) if damaged replace with
genuine CORTEC parts.

5. Lift adapter bearing bonnet hanger (15) up and out of bracket bearing hanger (19). Remove
both thrust washers (9) and bearing (8). Inspect and replace any damaged parts with
genuine CORTEC parts.

6. Remove and inspect O-Ring (13) from adapter bearing bonnet hanger (15) if damaged
replace with genuine CORTEC parts.

7. Use a 7/16" socket and racket turning counterclockwise to remove grease fitting (6).

8. Open safety wire and remove retainer safety pin (22).

9. Remove all four hex head cap screws (17) on the gantry arm (7). Use a 9/16" wrench to
turning counterclockwise to remove. Pull bracket bearing hanger (19) out of the gantry arm
(7).

10. Slide Gantry Arm (7) out of the Gantry bracket (16); and place aside.

11. Use a Crescent wrench or 1-1/8" wrench to hold back-up on the shoulder bolt (23) hex. Using
with a 1” wrench or another Crescent remove both jam nuts (25) on the shoulder bolt (23) by
turning counterclockwise. Hold bearing (24) and pull shoulder bolt (23) completely out of the
gantry bracket assemble (16).

12. Repeat this on all remaining shoulder bolts.

13. Remove the six hex head cap screws (17) and lock washers (1) that attach the gantry arm
bracket (16) to the inner swivel plate (3); use a 9/16" wrench to turn counterclockwise to
remove.

14. On the inner swivel mounting plate (3);remove both grease fittings(6)using a 7/16" wrench
turning them counterclockwise to remove.

5-22 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

15. Turn the gantry base plate over and remove the four HSFHCS screws (10). Using a 1/8" Allen
wrench turning counterclockwise to remove all four HSFHCS screws (10). This will allow the
inner swivel plate (3), bottom plate (4) and the top plate (2) to separate. Remove O-Ring (11)
and O-Ring (12). Inspect and replace any damaged parts with genuine CORTEC parts.

Disassembled Inspection:
(Refer to Figure 5-9 on page 5-19.)

After the gantry assembly is completely disassembled, make a visual inspection of all items and
replace as needed with authentic CORTEC parts.

Inspect all surfaces for visual signs of corrosion or wear affects. If damage to arm and bearings
are present it will compromise the proper function of the gantry. Inspection areas should include:

• All surfaces of the gantry arm for damage

• Base swivel mount; surface should be clean and free of debris

• Bearing hanger bracket

• Gantry bearings

• Retainer safety pin

Do not reuse if there is evidence of wear, damage or corrosion. Replacement of all other parts
should be based on evidence of wear, damage, or corrosion.

Assembly of the Gantry:


(Refer to Figure 5-9 on page 5-19.)

1. Start with bottom mounting plate (4) on a flat work surface.

2. Take the inner swivel mounting plate (3) and install both grease fittings (6) using Teflon tap on
the threads.(USE CRESCENT OR 7/16" WRENCH) Apply grease to entire bottom of inner swivel
plate (3) and install O-Ring (11); set on top of bottom mounting plate align the bores
together.

3. Grease outer diameter of the inner swivel plate (3) where O-Ring (12) will make contact.

4. Grease the inner diameter and O-Ring groove of the top mounting plate (2). Next install the
O-Ring (12) into the inner diameter of the top mounting plate (2).

5. Place top mounting plate (2) on top swivel and bottom plate. Align the four small holes so
that the four HSFHCS screws (10) can be installed. Once the holes are aligned place a good
quality anti-seize lubricant on each HSFHCS screw (10). Using a 1/8" Allen wrench install each
screw (10) into holes on bottom side of the bottom mounting plate (4). Turning screws (10)
clockwise to tighten.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-23


MPD-READY® Product Manual

6. Time to attach the gantry arm bracket (16) to the swivel plate (3) using hex head cap screws
(17) and lock washers (1). Using good quality anti-seize lubricant lubricate the holes on the
swivel plate (3) and the threads on the hex head cap screws (17). The gantry arm bracket will
straddle the two grease fittings that are installed on the inner swivel plate (3). Use a 9/16"
wrench to turning clockwise tighten the six hex head cap screws to secure the gantry arm
bracket (16) to the inner swivel mount (3).

7. There are four shoulder bolts (23) used as the bearing (24) axis point. Each shoulder bolt has
knock-in type grease fittings; if not installed simple use a grease fitting installation tool and tap
fitting into the head of each shoulder bolt (23). Locate the two bottom horizontal holes that
run through the gantry arm bracket (16). Apply grease to the two lower shoulder bolts (23)
shafts wear the bearing (24) will ride. Place a bearing (24) on the inside of the gantry arm
bracket (16) in line with one of the bottom holes and slide shoulder bolt (23) through the
bearing (24) until the shoulder bolt (23) passes through the gantry arm bracket (16). Repeat
this in the remaining bottom hole. Next lubricate the shoulder bolt (23) threads with a good
quality anti-seize lubricant. Time to install the jam nuts (25). Use a Crescent wrench or 1-1/8"
wrench to hold back-up on the shoulder bolt (23) hex. Place the first jam nut (25) onto the
shoulder bolt (23) by turning clockwise until snug with a 1” wrench or another Crescent. Then
place the second jam nut (25) onto the shoulder bolt (23) by turning clockwise and also snug
tight with 1" wrench or Crescent. Repeat this on other bottom bolt.

8. Now the gantry arm (7) can be installed through the gantry arm bracket (16) and rest on the
two bottom bearings in which were previously installed. Place the gantry arm (7) about
midway through the gantry arm bracket (16).

9. Apply grease to the two upper shoulder bolts (23) shafts wear the bearing (24) will ride. Place
a bearing (24) on the inside of the gantry arm bracket (16) in line with one of the top holes
and slide shoulder bolt (23) through the bearing (24) until the shoulder bolt (23) passes
through the gantry arm bracket (16). Repeat this in the remaining top hole. Next lubricate the
shoulder bolt (23) threads with a good quality anti-seize lubricant. Time to install the jam nuts
(25). Use a Crescent wrench or 1-1/8" wrench to hold back-up on the shoulder bolt (23) hex.
Place the first jam nut (25) onto the shoulder bolt (23) by turning clockwise until snug with a 1"
wrench or another Crescent. Then place the second jam nut (25) onto the shoulder bolt (23)
by turning clockwise and also snug tight with 1" wrench or Crescent. Repeat this on the other
top bolt. Using a grease gun pump grease through the grease fittings (26) located on the four
shoulder bolts (23) until you can visually see the grease come out the bearing (24).

10. Place a good quality anti-seize lubricant in the internal threads if the bracket bearing hanger
(19). Slide bracket bearing hanger (19) into the open end of the gantry arm (7). Align the
through holes on the gantry arm (7) with the tapped holes in the bracket bearing hanger (19).
Anti-seize lubricate the threads of the four hex head screws (17). Use a 9/16" wrench turning
clockwise to install hex head screws (17) into tapped holes of the bracket bearing hanger
(19). Place the retainer safety pin through the remaining hole which runs through the bracket
bearing hanger (19) and gantry arm (7). Latch the safety wire on the safety pin (22).

11. Onto building the bracket bearing hanger (19), put a liberal amount of grease inside the
interior bore of the bracket bearing hanger (19).

5-24 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

12. Wrap the threads on the grease fitting (6) with Teflon tape. This grease fitting (6) will be
installed into the bearing bonnet hanger adaptor (15). Place anti-seize lubricant in the
tapped hole on the bearing bonnet hanger adaptor (15). Place grease fitting (6) into tapped
hole on bearing bonnet hanger adaptor (15); use a 7/16” socket and racket turning
clockwise to tighten. Use grease to lubricate the outside and groove of the bearing bonnet
hanger adaptor (15) and install O-Ring (13).

13. Lubricate the area inside the bracket bearing hanger (19) where the bearing (8) and thrust
washer (9) will sit with grease. NOTE: LUBRICATE ALL BEARINGS (8) AND THRUST WASHERS (9)
WITH GREASE BEFORE INSTALLING. Slip one thrust washer (9), then a bearing (8), and then a
thrust washer (9) into the bracket bearing hanger (19) pocket. Next lubricate the outside
diameters of the adaptor bearing bonnet hanger (15) with grease; insert adaptor into the
bearing (8) stack up.

14. Place grease on the face groove and first interior bore in the adaptor bonnet hanger (21)
and install O-Ring (27). Place a good quality anti-seize lubricant in the internal threads if the
adaptor bonnet hanger (21). Install greased thrust washer (9) into the interior counter-bore
step of the adaptor bonnet hanger (21), then a greased bearing (8), and finally a greased
thrust washer (9).

15. Apply good quality anti-seize lubricant to the external threads on the adaptor bearing
bonnet hanger (15). Take the adaptor bonnet hanger (21) and thread onto the adaptor
bearing bonnet hanger (15) by turning clockwise. A spanner wrench is used to hold as a
backup on the adaptor bearing bonnet hanger (15). Make parts up rigid.

16. Apply good quality anti-seize lubricant to the external threads on the adaptor bonnet hanger
(21) and internal threads on the top clamp adaptor nut hanger (20). Take the top clamp
adaptor nut hanger (20) and thread onto the adaptor bonnet hanger (21) by turning
clockwise. Make parts up rigid at this time. Height will be adjusted at time of installation onto
the choke. Refer to “Mounting the Gantry to the Choke — Adjustment of the Bonnet Hanger”.

17. The bottom clamp of the nut hanger is held on by two socket head cap screws (18). Apply
good quality anti-seize lubricant to the external threads on the two socket head cap screws
(18) and on the internal threads of the top clamp nut hanger (20). Align bottom clamp holes
with the tapped holes on the top nut hanger clamp (20) and install the two socket head cap
screws turning clockwise until tight with a 3/8" Allen wrench.

18. Using a grease gun to pump all grease fittings (6) before operation.

19. The gantry is now completely assembled and ready to be mounted to choke

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-25


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Mounting the Gantry to the Choke — Adjustment of the Bonnet


Hanger
(Refer to Figure 5-9 on page 5-19 and Figure 5-10 on page 5-20.)

1. If the bottom nut hanger clamp (20) is installed on gantry assembly it must be removed via
two socket head cap screws (18) before the gantry system is to be installed onto the
choke.(USE 3/8" ALLEN WRENCH)

2. Place a good quality anti-seize lubricant in the four tapped holes on the selected flat side of
the CX3 choke body.

3. Once the bottom nut hanger clamp is removed place the assembled gantry system onto the
selected flat side of the CX3 choke body to be used.

Note
SEE ILLUSTRATION IOM-116A FOR PROPER
MOUNTING POSITIONS. The nut hanger clamp
(20) should be placed in between the jack
housing and wing nut of the CX3 choke.

4. Align the four through holes on the mounting plates with the four tapped holes on the square
choke body. Place a hex head cap screw (5) into each of the four holes and turn clockwise
using a 1-1/16” wrench to affix the gantry to the CX3 choke body.

5. Using a spanner wrench adjust the height of the nut hanger assembly until it is flush with
mounting neck diameter. The bottom clamp of the nut hanger is held on by two socket head
cap screws (18). Apply good quality anti-seize lubricant to the external threads on the two
socket head cap screws (18) and on the internal threads of the top clamp nut hanger (20).
Align bottom clamp holes with the tapped holes on the top nut hanger clamp (20) and install
the two socket head cap screws turning clockwise until tight using a 3/8” Allen wrench.

5-26 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Gate Valve Maintenance


The Gate valve should be maintained with adequate lubricant at all times. Lubrication is only
subjected to washing and contamination during opening and closing cycles. In the fully-open or
fully-closed positions, the gate valve body cavity lubricant is isolated from the flow stream.

Warning!
The gate valve body cavity holds
approximately 150 – 300 psi. Take precautions
to ensure that pressure is bled off by cycling
the valve to bleed body cavity pressure in the
line.

Gate Valve Components


Gate Valve components. Refer to Figure 5-11 on page 5-28 and Figure 5-12 on page 5-29.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-27


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-11: Gate Valve Exterior. Refer to Figure 5-13 on page 5-30 for BOM.

5-28 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Figure 5-12: Gate Valve Cutaway View. Refer to Figure 5-13 on page 5-30 for BOM.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-29


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-13: Gate Valve BOM. Refer to Figure 5-11 on page 5-28 and Figure 5-12 on page 5-29.

5-30 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Replacing Leaking Stem Packing


Perform this procedure in the event of excessive stem packing leakage.

Warning!
Trapped pressure in the body cavity must be
bled off prior to lubrication! Be aware that H2S
or similar toxic materials may be in the fluid.
Wear appropriate protective equipment, and
take protective measures as recommended by
company safety policy.

1. Backseat the stem and leave it in the back-seated position.

2. If the valve is in the fully-closed position, proceed to step 3. If the valve is in the open position,
rotate the handwheel clockwise to the fully-closed position.

3. Loosen the bearing cap one full turn.

4. Turn the handwheel clockwise approximately 1/2 turn. This will drive the gate valve against
the bottom of the valve body, and the additional handwheel rotation will cause the stem to
rise in the bonnet to effect the backseat.

5. Remove the handwheel by removing the pin the handwheel.

6. Remove the bearing cap by turning counter-clockwise.

7. Remove the stem adapter. Drive out the stem pin with a drift that is smaller in diameter than
the pin. The stem adapter will simply lift off the stem.

8. Remove the packing gland by turning counter-clockwise with a standard open-ended


wrench.

9. Connect a grease gun to the upper external bonnet grease fitting found on the bonnet neck.
The stem should be left in the back-seated position. Pump out the stem packing with the
grease gun.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-31


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Replacing the Gate


Excessive wear to the seats and/or gate may occur from rigorous use, or improper preventative
maintenance. The seats and gate for the gate valve can usually be repaired without removing
the valve from the line. Perform this procedure in the event of excessive gate or seat leakage.

1. Isolate the gate valve in the system by blocking valves upstream and downstream.

2. Bleed pressure down the line from a vent other than the gate valve itself. To bleed the line
through the gate valve, rotate the handwheel to the half open/closed position.

3. Loosen and remove all bonnet bolts or nuts as applicable.

4. Turn the handwheel in the clockwise direction until the gate bottoms out in the bottom of the
body. Continue clockwise rotation. This should lift the bonnet away from the body of the
valve. If the valve has been in service for some time, it may be necessary to strike the bonnet
flange with a hammer to help break the bonnet seal. Be careful not to damage studs or
grease fittings.

5. When the handwheel rotation can go no further, use a lifting device to lift the entire bonnet
assembly straight up off the body. The gate will come along.

6. Remove each seal assembly one at a time from the valve body with a screwdriver. Seat
retainers are a close-tolerance slip fit, but should slide out easily. Do not attempt to separate
the seat from the seat retainer while still in the valve body.

7. Clean seat retainer recesses thoroughly. “Disassembling the Bearing (All Sizes)” on page 5-59
for seal and backup ring arrangement.

8. Lightly lubricate the new seal assemblies and install one at a time. Do not use excessive force,
presses, or special tools.

9. Lightly lubricate the new gate. To start the leading edge of the gate between the seal
assemblies, a slight rocking motion may be needed. Light bumping with a wood mallet, but
take special care not to damage the gate.

10. Replace the bonnet gasket with a new one. Do not re-use the old bonnet gasket! Place studs
in place if applicable.

11. To remount the bonnet assembly, position the stem on top of the gate and rotate the
handwheel counter-clockwise until the bonnet contacts the bonnet gasket. Further rotation
will begin raising the gate toward the open position.

12. Complete the assembly by installing the bonnet bolt, or nuts as applicable, and torque to
specification (see Table 5-2 on page 5-33), alternately tightening diagonally from one side of
the bonnet bolt circle to the opposite side.

5-32 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Table 5-2: Gate Valve Fittings Torque Chart


Fitting Size Torque (ft-lb)
1/8" NPT 12
1/4" NPT 25
3/8" NPT 40
1/2" NPT 54
3/4" NPT 78
1" NPT 112
1-1/4" NPT 154
1-1/2" NPT 211
2" NPT 300
3/8" Autoclave 35
9/16" Autoclave 90

Lubrication Instructions
Follow the inspection and lubrication schedule below to maintain smooth operation and product
warranty.

Table 5-3: Gate Valve Inspection and Lubrication Schedule


No. of Cycles Monthly After Kick
Fill with Clean Fluid 10 X X
Lubricate Body 10 X
Pressure Test X
Inspect for Stem Packing Leaks X
Inspect for Smooth Valve Operation X X
Inspect Flanges for Leaks X X
Inspect Grease Fittings and Injection Ports

Types of Grease
1. Use “Magnaseal” to maximize service life.

2. If Magnaseal is not available, a high viscosity all-purpose grease should be used. When using
an all-purpose grease, lubrication frequency should be shortened to compensate the limited
characteristics of all-purpose grease.

Greasing the Handwheel


Extreme pressure multipurpose grease MULTIS MS2 or equivalent. For low temperatures use a
grease suitable for use at -50 °C such as Optitemp TT IEP.

1. An Alemite fitting is location just under the handwheel.

2. Use a standard grease gun for the Alemite fitting to pump lubricant.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-33


MPD-READY® Product Manual

3. A vent under the outside O-ring near the Alemite fitting will allow surplus grease to escape.
Add grease until surplus grease is forced from the vent.

Body Cavity Lubrication


1. Lubricate the gate valve with the valve either in the fully-open or fully-closed position. The
fully-open position is preferred. In the fully-closed position, the stem may not be lubricated.
After thoroughly lubricating the valve, cycle the valve to the fully-open position and lubricate
the stem. See See “Gate Valve Stem Lubrication” on page 5-35.

Warning!
Trapped pressure in the body cavity must be
bled off prior to lubrication! Be aware that H2S
or similar toxic materials may be in the fluid.
Wear appropriate protective equipment, and
take protective measures as recommended by
company safety policy.

2. Remove the cap (only) of the bonnet grease fitting. Do not remove the grease fitting from the
bonnet.

3. Connect the grease gun to the grease fitting.

4. Pump lubricant into the valve body. A check valve inside the body will prevent pressure loss,
but will accept grease input. Valves with working 10K and 15K will have check valves.

5. If line contaminants are evident, pump new grease until the old grease is expunged from the
system.

6. Remove the grease gun.

7. Replace the cap on the bonnet grease fitting and tighten.

5-34 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Gate Valve Stem Lubrication

Warning!
Trapped pressure in the body cavity must be
bled off prior to lubrication! Be aware that H2S
or similar toxic materials may be in the fluid.
Wear appropriate protective equipment, and
take protective measures as recommended by
company safety policy.

1. Backseat the stem and leave it in the back seated position.

2. If the valve is in the closed position, proceed to step 3. If the valve is in the open position,
rotate the hand wheel clockwise to the full-closed position.

3. Loosen the bearing cap one full turn.

4. Turn the handwheel clockwise approximately 1/2 turn. The gate valve will be driven against
the bottom of the valve body. Additional handwheel rotation will cause the stem to rise in the
bonnet to backseat the stem.

5. Remove the handwheel by removing the pin in the handwheel.

6. Remove the bearing cap by turning counter-clockwise.

7. Remove the stem adapter. Drive out the stem pin with a drift that is smaller than the pin. The
stem adapter will be able to be simply lifted off the stem.

8. Turn the packing gland counter-clockwise with a standard open-ended wrench to remove
the packing gland.

9. Connect a grease gun to the upper external bonnet grease fitting under the bonnet neck.
Pump out the stem packing with the grease gun.

Actuator Lubrication
Unless specially ordered for extreme climatic conditions, Rotork actuators are dispatched with
gearcases filled with SAE 80EP oil which is suitable for ambient temperatures ranging from -30 to
+70 ºC (-22 to +160 °F). IQ actuators do not require regular oil changes.

Lubricating Oil
Refer to actuator name plate. IQ actuators are lubricated using the oil grades specified below.
They are factory filled for life and in normal service do not require topping up.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-35


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Table 5-4: Actuator Lubricating Oil

Ambient Temperature Actuator Lubricating Oil


-30 to 70 °C (-22 to 160 °F) SAE 80EP lubricating oil
-30 °C (-22 °F) Mobil SHC 624 lubricating oil

Food Grade Lubricating Oil


If user specified, IQ actuators will be filled with Hydralube GB Heavy food grade lubricating oil
suitable for temperature range -30 to 70 °C (-22 to 160 °F).

Grease (Linear Drive Unit)


IQL and IQML linear drive assemblies should be regularly lubricated using extreme pressure multi-
purpose grease MULTIS MS2 or equivalent.

Grease (Base Assembly)


O-rings use either Multis EP2 / Lithoshield EP2 or equivalent for all temperature ranges between -50
and +70 ºC (-58 and +158 ºF).

Table 5-5: Standard Weight and Lubricating Oil Capacities

Weight Capacity
Actuator Size
kg (lb) liters (pt. -US)
IQ10 31 (68) 1.25 (2.64)
IQ12 31 (68) 1.25 (2.64)
IQ18 31 (68) 1.25 (2.64)
IQ19 54 (119) 1.9 (4.0)*
IQ20 54 (119) 1.9 (4.0)*
IQ25 54 (119) 1.9 (4.0)*
IQ35 54 (119) 1.9 (4.0)*
IQ35 75 (165) 2.4 (5.1)
IQ40 145 (320) 3.7 (7.8)
IQ70 145 (320) 3.7 (7.8)
IQ90 160 (353) 3.7 (7.8)
IQ91 150 (331) 3.7 (7.8)
IQ95 160 (353) 3.7 (7.8)
* Oil capacity shown for Top Hand Wheel actuators. Side Hand Wheel actuator capacity is 2.20
(4.65).

Inverted Installation
If inverted installation (base uppermost) was specified with the order, Rotork will oil fill to the
quantities shown in the table below and the actuator will be labeled, “Factory filled with
additional oil for inverted use.” If not specified with order but site installation will be inverted, to
ensure adequate lubrication the installer must top up the oil before installation using the top oil
plug by the amount indicated in the table.

5-36 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Table 5-6: Lubricating Oil Capacity (Inverted Installation)

Inverted Oil Capacity Top-up Quantity


Actuator Size
liters (pt.-US) liters (pt.-US)
IQ10, 12, 18 1.25 (2.64) 0.0 (0.0)
IQ19, 20, 25 1.90 (4.0)* 0.0 (0.0)
IQ35 2.75 (5.81) 0.35 (0.74)
IQ40, 70, 90, 91, 95 5.7 (12.04) 2.0 (4.23)

Actuator Controls

Note
The official version of this section is available on
www.rotork.com.

The actuator is supplied by Rotork®. This section manual contains important safety information.
Thoroughly read and understand this information before installing, operating, or maintaining
equipment. See www.rotork.com for latest information. This section of the manual is used with
permission.

Specifications
Enclosure: Constructed in accordance with IEC 60529 to IP54.

Standards: ATEX II 1G, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga; IECEx - Ex ia IIC T4 Ga; USA - FM Int Safe Class I, Div 1, Groups
A, B, C & D, T4; Canada - CSA Exia Int Safe, Calss I, Div 1, Groups A, B, C & D, T4.

Ambient Temperature Range: Tamb = -30 °C to +50 °C

Operating Range: Infra Red 0.75m. Bluetooth® 10m

Enclosure Materials: Polycarbonate ABS blend, Polycarbonate and Silicon Rubber

Health and Safety


This manual is produced to enable a competent user to install, operated, adjust and inspect
Rotork IQ range valve actuators. Only persons competent by virtue of their training or experience
should install, maintain and repair Rotork actuators.

Under no circumstances should replacement parts be used in Rotork actuators, other than those
supplied or specified by Rotork.

Work undertaken must be carried out in accordance with the instructions in this and any other
relevant manuals.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-37


MPD-READY® Product Manual

If the actuator is used in a manner not specified in this manual and any other Rotork manual, the
protection provided by the actuator may be impaired.

The user and those persons working on this equipment should be familiar with their responsibility
under any statutory provision relating to the Health and Safety of their workplace. Due
consideration of additional hazards should be taken when using the IQ range of actuators with
other equipment. Should further information and guidance relating to the safe use of the Rotork
IQ range of actuators be required, it will be provided on request. The electrical installation,
maintenance and use of these actuators should be carried out in accordance with the National
Legislation and Statutory Provisions relating to the safe use of this equipment, applicable to the
site of installation.

For the UK: Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 and the guidance given in the applicable edition
of the “IEE Wiring Regulations” should be applied. Also the user should be fully aware of his duties
under the Health and Safety Act 1974. For the USA: NFPA70, National Electrical Code® is
applicable.

The mechanical installation should be carried out as outlined in this manual and also in
accordance with relevant standards such as British Standard Codes of Practice. If the actuator
has nameplates indicating that it is suitable for installation in hazardous areas then the actuator
may be installed in Zone 1, Zone 21, Zone 2 and Zone 22 (or Div 1 or Div 2, class I or Class II)
classified hazardous area locations only. It should not be installed in hazardous area locations
with an ignition temperature less than 135 °C, unless suitability for lower ignition temperatures has
been indicated on the actuator nameplate.

It should only be installed in hazardous area locations compatible with the gas and dust groups
stated on the nameplate. The electrical installation, maintenance and the use of the actuator
should be carried out in accordance with the code of practice relevant with the code of
practice relevant for that particular Hazardous Area certification.

No inspection or repair should be undertaken unless it conforms tot he specific hazardous area
certification requirements. Under no circumstances should any modification or alteration be
carried out on the actuator as this could invalidate the actuators hazardous area approval
certification. Access to live electrical conductors is forbidden in the hazardous area unless this is
done under a special permit to work, otherwise all power should be isolated and the actuator
moved to a non-hazardous area for repair or attention.

Warning: Service Altitude: The actuator installation altitude must be restricted to less than 2000 m
as defined by IEC61010-1 (Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control
and laboratory use).

Warning: Motor Temperature: Under normal operation the temperature of actuator’s motor cover
surfaces can exceed 60 °C above ambient.

Warning: Surface Temperature: The installer/user must ensure that the actuator surface
temperature rating is not influenced by external heating/cooling effect (e.g. valve/pipeline
process temperatures).

5-38 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Warning: Thermostat Bypass: If the actuator is configured to bypass the motor thermostat then
the hazardous area certification will be invalidated. Additional electrical hazards may occur
when using this configuration. The user should ensure that any necessary additional safety
measures are considered.

Warning: Enclosure Materials: IQ Range of actuators are manufacture from aluminum alloy with
stainless steel fasteners and the thrust bases are manufactured in cast iron.

The cover windows is toughened glass which is retained with a 2-part silicone cement and the
battery plug will be either stainless steel or PPS (Poly-Phenolyne Sulfide).

The user must ensure that the operating environment and any materials surrounding the actuator
cannot lead to a reduction in the safe us, or the protection afforded by, the actuator. Where
appropriate the user must ensure the actuator is suitably protected against its operating
environment.

Warning: Operating by Hand: With respect to handwheel operation of Rotork electric actuators,
see “Manual Operation of the Valve Actuator” on page 4-12.

Caution!
Actuator may start and operated when
remote is selected. This will be dependent on
remote control signal status and actuator
configuration.

Special Conditions
This actuator must only be located in areas where the risk of impact to the viewing window is low.
This equipment includes some exterior non-metallic parts including the protective coating. To
avoid the possibility of static build up, cleaning must only be carried out with a damp cloth.

Caution!
WARNING: External Enclosure Fasteners
Enclosure fasteners are stainless steel grade A4
80 except for the following sizes and when
marked on the nameplate as shown. In these
cases, the terminal cover fasteners are carbon
steel grade 12.9. If in doubt, check the grade
marked on the relevant fastener or contact
Rotork.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-39


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Actuator Bluetooth Setting Tool (BTST)


Use the supplied Rotork Bluetooth® Setting Tool Pro to access the actuator set up procedures,
non-intrusive setting of torque levels, position limits and all other control and indication functions
can be made safely, quickly and conveniently, even in hazardous locations. The IQ allows
commissioning and adjustment to be carried out with the main power supply to the actuator
switched on or off.

The Rotork Bluetooth® Setting Tool (BTST) is able to connect to Rotork Bluetooth® wireless enabled
actuators and related software to setup and complete missions. Missions are configurable
programs of instructions that are to be performed by the BTST on an actuator and include (but
are not limited to) downloading configuration and datalogger files as well as uploading specific
configurations to the actuator. Different missions can be programmed into the BTST via Insight2.

Visit www.rotork.com for more information on the IQ, Insight2, and other Rotork actuator ranges.
Refer to Publication PUB002-047 for repair, overhaul or spare part instructions. Refer to Publication
PUB002-040 for secondary function configuration instructions.

Figure 5-14: Connecting to the Actuator using the BTST

5-40 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

BTST Controls
The Actuator Setting Tool uses a Bluetooth connection to configure Actuator settings. The Rotork
Setting Tool incorporating Bluetooth wireless technology (Rotork Bluetooth® Setting Tool Pro (BTST)
is shown below. It is identified by the key symbols being clear and a clear seal between the top
and bottom casings.

Symbol Description

Up

Left/Decrease

Down

Right/Increase

Select/Save

Back

Forward

Pairing
ACTUATOR
SETTING TOOL

Pro Close Valve

Open Valve

Figure 5-15: Actuator Setting Tool

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-41


MPD-READY® Product Manual

The Infra-red only tool has filled yellow keys and a yellow seal between casings.

Figure 5-16: BTST keys

The Rotork Bluetooth® Setting Tool Pro with the relevant navigation and configuration keys is
shown below.

Up

Left/Decrease Right/ Increase


Select/ Save

Back Forward
Down
Figure 5-17: BTST Controls

Replacing the Actuator Setting Tool Batteries


Use Duracell Procell MN2400 or Energizer E92 AAA batteries only. Always replace all four batteries
at the same time.

5-42 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Connecting to the Actuator using the BTST


The default security set in the actuator for Bluetooth connection is by initiation using an infra red
command. This means that the user must be in close proximity and in direct line of sight of the
actuator.

1. Point the setting tool at the actuator display window within a range 0.25 m (10 in) and Press
the Down key. The Setting Tool will automatically connect using Bluetooth, which takes up to 5
seconds. Connection will be indicated by blue lights illuminating on the tool and in the
actuator display window.

Figure 5-18: Point at the Actuator display window and press Down to connect to the actuator.

2. The screen will change to the Main Menu screen.

Figure 5-19: The Main Menu Screen will be visible upon connection using the BTST

3. Once connected, the tool can be used without pointing it at the actuator display window.

4. Use the tool to navigate the system menus.

5. Bluetooth connection will be maintained while setting tool key commands are made. After a
period of 6 minutes with no key commands, the Bluetooth connection will be turned off and
the Setting tool and display blue lights will go out.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-43


MPD-READY® Product Manual

6. To manually turn off Bluetooth connection at any time, press and hold the setting tool Back
and Forward keys together.

Security (Actuator Password)


The default security level for connecting to the actuator is by infra- red Bluetooth initiation. This
requires that the user is at the actuator within 0.25 meter distance and in direct line of sight of the
display. For instruction on connecting to the actuator, see “Connecting to the Actuator using the
BTST” on page 5-43

Note
Password security may be changed. If
changed, contact RigLine 24/7™ Support.

1. All actuator settings can be viewed with the actuator selected to Local, Stop or remote.

2. To change an actuator setting, the actuator must be set to Local or Stop and a correct
password entered.

3. If the actuator is selected to Remote and a setting is selected, the following warning will be
displayed:

Figure 5-20: Warning Displayed. Settings may only be changed in Local or Stop Modes.

4. Select OK to return to the settings screen.

5. With the actuator set to Local or Stop and when any function is selected, the Password screen
will be displayed:

6. The factory-set default password ROTORK is displayed, and the OK key is highlighted.

5-44 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Figure 5-21: Enter the Password

7. Press Enter on the BTST. The password will be requested the first time a function is selected.
Once correctly entered, the password will not be required to be entered again fro the
duration of the BTST communication with the actuator. Other functions may be set as
required.

8. The settings screen will again be displayed. Figure 5-22 shows “Settings » Limits » Close
Settings” with the function “Action” highlighted.

Figure 5-22: Select Options in the Settings Screen

9. Press Enter on the BTST to select.

10. The function and its setting option or range will then be highlighted:

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-45


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-23: Highlights indicate the setting being adjusted.

11. If the user does not wish to change the function value, press the back button to escape
without saving the changes.

12. Use the Back or Forward arrow keys to adjust settings. In Figure 5-24, a close action for Torque
is selected.

Figure 5-24: Use the Back or Forward buttons to adjust settings.

13. Press Enter on the BTST to select.

14. The highlight will return to the function name only, and its stored setting will be displayed. See
Figure 5-25.

Figure 5-25: After entering changes, the highlight will return to the function name.

5-46 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Electronic Valve Actuator Menus

Warning!
Settings are configured at the time of
manufacture. Changing settings is NOT
recommended. Unauthorized adjustments can
result in danger to personnel and equipment.
Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support prior to
making adjustments.

Settings Menu CLOSE SETTINGS


Direction (CW/ACW)
Action (Torque/Limit)
Limits Torque (40 - 100%)
Set Limit

Indication
OPEN SETTINGS
Action (Torque/Limit)
Torque (40 - 100%)
Control
Set Limit

ESD
TORQUE SWITCH
BYPASS
Security Close
Closing Position (100 - 5%)
Open
Defaults Open Position (0 - 95%)

Figure 5-26: Rotork Actuator Settings Menu

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-47


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Basic Settings - Limits

Caution!
Verify settings and operation by electric
operation and function test of the actuated
valve.

1. Connect using the BTST.

2. Enter Local or Stop mode.

3. Enter the password.

4. From the Position display home screen, press Down on BTST. The main menu will be displayed.

5. Navigate to the Settings menu by pressing Down, Up, Back, and Forward buttons. Press Enter
to select.

Figure 5-27: The Settings Menu

Settings
Limits
Indication
Control
ESD
Security
Defaults
Figure 5-28: Settings Menu Options

5-48 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Limits
Close Settings
Direction Clock Anti
Action Limit Torque
Torque 40%
Set Limit
Open Settings
Action Limit Torque
Torque 40%
Set Limit
Turns 25
Position 95.0

Torque Switch Bypass


Opening On X Off
OP. Bypass Pos 10%
Closing On X Off
CL. Bypass Pos 90%

1 / 15

Figure 5-29: Limit Settings (Default Values)

Close Settings
Close Direction: Sets the direction required to close the valve. Manually operate the actuator
and valve to establish closing direction.

Close Action: Configure to close on torque for seating valve types or limit for non-seating valve
types. Refer to valve manufacturer for recommended setting. In the absence of valvemaker
instructions, see Figure 5-30.

Close Open
Valve Type
Action Action
Wedge gate Torque Limit
Globe Torque Limit
Butterfly Limit Limit
Through Conduit Limit Limit
Ball Limit Limit
Plug Limit Limit
Sluice gate Limit Limit
Penstock Limit Limit
Parallel Slide Limit Limit
Figure 5-30: Valve Type (Generic Recommendations). It is recommended that the manufacturer’s recommendation.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-49


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Close Torque: The value can be set between 40% and 100% of rated. The actuator rated torque
value is shown on its nameplate.

Set Close Limit: Move the actuator and value to the close position. Allow for overrun by winding in
the opening direction by 1/2 to 1 turn.

Open Settings
Open Action: The actuator can be configured open on torque for seating valve types or lmit for
non-seating valve types. Refer to valve manufacturer for recommended setting. In the absence
of valvemaker instruction, set open action to “Limit.”

Open Torque: The valve of torque available to open the valve can be set between 40% and 100%
of rated. The actuator rated torque valve is shown on its nameplate.

Set Open Limit: Move the actuator and valve to the open position. Allow for overrun by winding in
the closing direction by 1/2 to 1 turn.

Turns (not editable): Shows the actuator output turns between the set Closed and Open limit.

Position (not editable): Shows the actuator current position in terms of % open. Note: Turns and
Position values do not update while being displayed on screen. To see updated values, use the
Minus key to return to the Settings menu, then select Limits.

Torque Switch Bypass:


The default setting for opening and closing torque switch bypass is Off (torque protection active
at all times). Bypassing the torque protection allows torque up to approximately 150% of rated to
be available. The valvemaker/ integrator should be consulted to confirm the valve structure and
interface components can withstand the additional torque/thrust.

Opening: Opening torque protection can be bypassed over a configurable portion of the
opening stroke. When enabled, torque up to approximately 150% of rated torque is available for
opening “sticky” valves.

Opening Bypass Position: When enabled, the position over the opening stroke where the torque
protection is bypassed can be configured in the position range 0% (closed limit) to 95% open.
Outside the bypass position, torque switch value will revert to that set.

Closing: Closing torque protection can be bypassed over a configurable portion of the closing
stroke. When enabled, torque up to approximately 150% of rated torque is available for closing
the valve. Outside the bypass position, torque switch value will revert to that set.

Closing Bypass Position: When enabled, the position over the Closing stroke where the torque
protection is bypassed can be configured in the position range 100% (open limit) to 5% open.

Torque and Position Monitoring


The IQ range of actuators incorporate real time, instantaneous Torque & Position monitoring as
standard.

5-50 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Torque & Position can be used to monitor valve performance during operation. The effect of
process changes (differential pressure etc.) can be evaluated, tight spots in valve travel can be
pinpointed as well as gauging the torque developed through stroke in order to set appropriate
open and closed torque switch settings.

There a two home screen displays that indicate torque and position simultaneously.

Figure 5-31: Analogue Torque and Position indication

Figure 5-31 shows that actuator at 35.0% open, producing 27% of rated torque. The warning
triangle indicates the actuator has torque tripped.

Note: The torque and position values displayed are dynamic and will show the actual torque and
position values currently measured. After a torque trip, the torque value tends to drop away as
the internal mechanical components relax as no drive is present.

Figure 5-32: Digital Torque and Position Indication

Figure 5-32 shows that actuator at 35.0% open, producing 27% of rated torque. The status bar and
warning triangle indicate that the actuator has torque tripped when closing.

Note: The actuator will torque trip and stop when the value of torque reaches that set for the
open (when opening) and closing (when closing) torque switches. Due to the effects of inertia
(variable with speed/load) and valve resilience, the torque delivered and displayed may be
higher.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-51


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Instructions for Safe Selection, Installation, Use, Maintenance and


Repair:
1. The BTST must only be used in hazardous areas (potentially explosive atmosphere) permitted
by the equipment classification, temperature class and ambient temperature range stated
above (this is also stated on the back of the BTST).

2. The following checks must the conducted on the BTST prior to taking it into a hazardous area:
a. The BTST function must the checked by ensuring that the red or green LED, either in the
clear window or under the “Enter” key of the BTST, illuminates when any button is pressed. If
an LED does not illuminate, there is a potential functional problem with the BTST and the
inspection or battery replacement stated below in paragraph 6 must be performed.

b. If the BTST is likely to come in contact with aggressive substances (e.g. solvents that may
affect polymeric materials), then it is the responsibility of the user to take suitable
precautions (e.g. regular checks as part of the routine inspections or establishing that the
enclosure materials are resistant to the specific chemicals) that prevent the STST being
adversely affected, thus ensuring that the type of protection is not compromised.

3. It is essential that the actuator settings are checked for compatibility with the valve, process
and control system requirements before the actuator is put into service.

4. No user adjustment of the BTST is required.

5. The BTST must be inspected every three months, in a safe (non-hazardous), dry area by
suitably trained personnel, to ensure it has been maintained in accordance with the
applicable code of practice.

6. In accordance with the STST hazardous area approval and with the recommendations from
the approved battery suppliers, the following are mandatory requirements for safe use:
a. The inspections or replacement of the batteries must be conducted in a safe (non-
hazardous), dry area.

b. The batteries must be removed from the BTST when it is not expected to be used for 3
months or longer.
c. Discharged batteries must be removed from the BTST to prevent possible damage.
d. The battery compartment of the BTST must be inspected every 3 months for any battery
leakage. If any battery leakage has occurred then the BTST must not be used.
e. Only the following approved Alkaline-Manganese or Zinc-Manganese tyep “AAA” size
batteries must be fitted to the BTST:
• Duracell: Procell MN2400

• Energizer: E92

f. Always replace all four batteries at the same time. Always use four unused batters of the
same approved manufacturer, type and expiry date code.

5-52 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

g. Ensure the batteries are fitted with the correct polarity. The battery polarity (+) is indicated
on the inside of the battery compartment of the BTST.
h. The BTST contains no other user replaceable parts and it cannot be repaired by the user. If
the BTST is faulty or needs repairing, it must not be used.

Electronic Valve Actuator


The Electronic Valve Actuator is manufactured by Rotork. The Rotork actuator is used for precise
and programmable actuating of the choke manifold valves.

Every Rotork actuator has been fully tested before dispatch to give years of trouble-free
operation providing it is installed, sealed and commissioned in accordance with the instructions
given in this publication.

The IQ actuator's unique double sealed, non-intrusive enclosure provides complete protection for
the actuator components.

The IQ actuator gearing is located in an oil bath and is lubricated for life and does not need
replenishing. Should the oil be removed or lost it must not be electrically operated as premature
failure may result.

Covers should not be removed for routine inspection as this may be detrimental to the future
reliability of the actuator.

The electrical control module cover is bonded by the Rotork quality control seal. It should not be
removed as the module contains no site-serviceable components.

All electrical power supplies to the actuator must be isolated before any maintenance or
inspection is carried out, except replacement of the battery.

Electrical supplies must be isolated before actuator covers are removed. See “Replacing the
Actuator Battery” on page 5-56.

Routine maintenance should include the following:

• Check actuator to valve fixing bolts for tightness.

• Ensure valve stems and drive nuts are clean and properly lubricated.

• If the motorized valve is rarely operated, a routine operating schedule should be set up.

• Replace actuator battery every 5 years.

• Check the actuator enclosure for damage, loose or missing fasteners.

• Ensure there is not an excessive build up of dust or contaminant on the actuator.

• Check for any loss of lubricants.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-53


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Actuator Maintenance
Approved Fuses
FS1 = Bussman TDC11 (rating as per transformer type. See actuator wiring diagram for transformer
type).

Type 1 = 250 mA anti-surge

Type 2 = 250 mA anti-surge

Type 3 = 150 mA anti-surge FS2 (ATEX units only)

Bussman TDS 500 - 100 mA Quickblow

or Littel Fuse 217 - 100 mA Quickblow

Vibration, Shock and Noise


Standard IQ range actuators are suitable for applications where vibration and shock severity
does not exceed the following:
Table 5-7: Vibration, Shock, and Noise Limits for Acutators

Type Level
Plant-induced 1g rms total for all vibration within the frequency
Vibration range of 10 to 1000 Hz.
Shock 5g peak acceleration
2g acceleration over a frequency range of 1 to 50
Seismic
Hz, if it is to operate during and after the event.
Independent test have shown that at 1m
Emitted Noise
generated noise does not exceed 65 db(A).

Conditions of Safe Use for Actuators


Table 5-8: Thread Details for ATEX and IECEx-Approved Actuators

Actuator Type and


Threaded Flamepath Thread Size Thread Length
Size
Battery Cover M40x1.5 10.00 All
M25x1.5 20.00 All
Cable Entry
M40x1.5 20.00 All

5-54 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc.

Flamepath Max. Gap (mm) Min. Length (mm) Actuator Type and Size

Motor Cover / Gearcase 0.15 25.00 IQ10, IQ12, IQ18, IQ19, IQ20, IQ25, IQ35, IQM10, IQM12, IQM20, IQM25, IQS12, IQS20, IQS35, IQ40, IQ70, IQ90, IQ91, IQ95
35.00 IQ10, IQ12, IQ18, IQM10, IQM12, IQS12
Wormshaft Shroud / Gearcase 0.05 38.00 IQ19, IQ20, IQ25, IQM20, IQM25, IQS20
35.00 IQ35, IQS35
Wormshaft Shroud / Gearcase -0.04/0.00 49.75 IQ40, IQ70, IQ90, IQ91, IQ95
26.00 IQ10, IQ12, IQ18, IQM10, IQM12, IQS12
Wormshaft / Wormshaft Shroud 0.24 26.00 IQ19, IQ20, IQ25, IQM20, IQM25, IQS20
27.00 IQ35, IQS35
Wormshaft / Wormshaft Shroud 0.25 49.75 IQ40, IQ70, IQ90, IQ91, IQ95
Terminal Bung Gearcase (IIB) 0.20 27.00 All Types and Sizes
Terminal Bung Gearcase (IIC) 0.115 27.00 All Types and Sizes
Terminal Cover / Gearcase 0.15 27.00 All Types and Sizes
Electrical Cover / Gearcase 0.15 26.00 All Types and Sizes
Encoder Shaft / Encoder Shaft Bush 0.08 27.00 All Types and Sizes
Encoder Shaft Bush / Gearcase 0.07 25.00 All Types and Sizes
28.75 IQ10, IQ12, IQ18, IQ19, I Q20, IQ25, IQ35, IQM10, IQM12, IQM20, IQM25, IQS12, IQS20, IQS35
Motor Loom Bush / Gearcase 0.15
33.25 IQ40, IQ70, IQ90, IQ91, IQ95
DC Motor Adaptor / Gearcase 0.15 25.00 IQD10, IQD12, IQD18, IQD20, IQD25
DC Motor Cover / DC Motor Cover Adaptor 0.15 12.50 IQD10, IQD12, IQD18, IQD20, IQD25

Note: Negative sign denotes an interference fit.

Figure 5-33: Maximum Constructional Flamepath Gaps for ATEX and IECEx Approved Actuators

Maintenance
5-55
MPD-READY® Product Manual

Replacing the Actuator Battery


The battery supports the actuator valve position indication relays, datalogger and the position
display (LCD) only when the main power supply is turned off. It ensures the current position is
indicated and displayed when manual operation takes place.

The battery is not required to retain any actuator settings or track position changes.

With mains power switched off and without a battery fitted or when discharged, all configured
settings are retained safely in EEPROM and position changes are tracked by the absolute
encoder.

On power up, the correct, current position will be displayed and the actuator will operate
normally.

Warning!
The battery holder in the actuator gearcase
also protects the user from the hazardous live
connections inside the actuator and therefore
it must not be damaged. The actuator must be
isolated or disconnected if the battery holder
has to be removed from the actuator
gearcase.

A unique circuit has been incorporated into the battery function of the IQ, effectively reducing
the overall drain and significantly increasing the battery life.

In normal circumstances battery replacement interval should not exceed 5 years. Ambient
temperature and plant operating conditions may affect battery life.

Battery level status is indicated by an icon on the actuator display. If the battery icon is displayed
the battery should be replaced to ensure correct power off valve position indication.

Figure 5-34: Battery status is indicated by an icon on the actuator display.

5-56 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Battery Replacement Procedure


Procedure

1. To prevent a gap in datalogger records, it is recommended that the accumulator battery be


replaced while the main power is ON.

Safety
If the actuator is located within a hazardous
area permission must be obtained in the form
of a "hot work permit" or other local regulation
before removal and/or replacement of the
battery.

2. Set the red selector switch on the actuator to STOP.

3. Use an appropriate Allen key to remove the labeled sealing plug on the main gearcase near
the hand wheel. If the battery sealing plug is metal, an 8 mm Allen key will be required. If the
battery sealing plug is plastic, a 10 mm Alley key will be required. Note: When removing the
sealing plug, ensure that the O-ring seal remains on the plug.

4. Disconnect the wiring harness.

5. Use the black pull-strap to remove the battery from the rubber sealing pocket.

Figure 5-35: Use the black pull-strap to remove the battery

6. Replace the battery with an approved battery type.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-57


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Table 5-9: Approved Rotork Actuator Battery Types


Enclosure Type Battery Type Detail
ATEX/IEC Ex- U9VL or
Ultralife PP3 Types
Standard Temp U9VL-J-P
ATEX/IEC Ex-
Rotork Part Numbers: 95-462 or 95-614
Low/High Temp

7. Fit the pull strap around the replacement battery and insert into the rubber sealing pocket.
Reconnect the wiring harness.

Warning!
The rubber sealing pocket in the actuator
gearcase protects the user from hazardous live
connections inside the actuator!
The actuator must be isolated or disconnected
if the rubber sealing pocket is to be removed
from the actuator gearcase.

8. Replace the sealing plug with O-ring.

9. Hand-tighten sealing plug to 5.9 ft-lb (8 Nm) using an appropriate Allen key.

10. After replacing the battery, the alarm icon will continue to be displayed until the next battery
check, which may take up to 1 hour. Cycle power to force a battery check and clear the
alarm.

Disassembling the Actuator


Preparing the Drive Bush (IQ Base-- All Sizes, Types A and Z3)
1. Turn actuator onto its side, remove the cap-headed screws holding retaining plate (1) onto
the thrust base and pull out the drive bush (2) complete with its bearing assembly (3). Size
IQ10 to 35 have 2 screws, size IQ40 to 95-F25 bases have 8 screws, and F30 have 10 screws.
Before machining the drive bush the thrust bearing must be removed.

2. IQ10 to 18 actuators have a sealed thrust bearing located on the drive bush and retained by
the split collar (4) and snap ring (5).

3. IQ20 to 95 have a thrust race bearing within a steel bearing housing located on the drive
bush and retained by the split collar (4) and snap ring (5). The bearing is sealed within its
housing by O-rings located on the drive bush and the bearing spacer ring (6).

5-58 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Caution!
Failure to remove the bearing assembly and O-
rings from the drive bush prior to machining
may result in damage to the bearing.

Disassembling the Bearing (All Sizes)


1. Locate and remove the snap ring (5) using a suitable tool. Remove the split collar (4) See Fig.
5.1.1. Slide the bearing (3) off the drive bush (2).

Note
Additional spacer (6) and O-rings must be
removed on sizes IQ20 to 95.

Figure 5-36: Keep Split Collar as a matching pair

2. Keep the bearings and drive bush locating components in a safe clean place. The split collar
(4) must be kept as a matched pair.

3. Machine the drive bush (2) to suit the valve stem, allowing a generous clearance on the
screw thread for rising steam threads.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-59


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Thrust Base
Thrust Base Housing
Housin
Housing

5. Snap Ring
5. Snap Ring
4. Split Collar

6. Bearing Spacer
4. Split Collar
Ring

3. Thrust Bearing
3. Sealed Thrust
Bearing

O-rings

2. Drive Bush
2. Drive Bush

1. Retaining Plate 1. Retaining Plate

Figure 5-37: F10 Base Assembly Figure 5-38: F14 and F16 Base Assembly

Thrust Base
Housing

5. Snap Ring

4. Split Collar

6. Bearing Spacer
Ring

3. Thrust Bearing

O-rings

2. Drive Bush

1. Retaining Plate

Figure 5-39: F25 and F30 Base Assembly

5-60 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Reassembly

Caution!
Failure to fully clean and grease the drive bush
and O-rings before reassembly can result in
damage.

1. Remove all swarf from the drive bush (2) ensuring all O-rings are undamaged, clean and
greased (for typical greases see “Standard Weight and Lubricating Oil Capacities” on
page 5-36).

2. Slide the bearing assembly (3) onto the drive bush (2) and ensure it is fitted down to the drive
bush shoulder. On size IQ20 to IQ95 refit bearing spacer ring (6) into bearing assembly
ensuring O-ring is fitted and greased. Grease and refit matched pair split collar (4) and snap
ring (5).

3. Grease and refit the drive bush bearing assembly into the thrust base housing on the
actuator, ensuring that the slots in the drive bush are located into the drive dogs of the hollow
output shaft.

4. Refit the retaining plate (1) and secure with cap headed screws. For IQ40 to IQ95 tighten
base retaining screws to the following torque values:
• F25 / FA25 Base - 8 off / M12 cap head screws: 89 Nm / 65 lbs.ft

• F30 / FA30 Base - 10 off / M16 cap head screws: 218 Nm / 160 lbs.ft

Non-Thrust Base (Type B)


All Sizes
1. Undo the hex head bolts securing the base plate to the gearcase and remove the base
plate.

2. The drive bush and its retaining clip can now be seen. The plate will vary with the size of the
actuator. See Figure 5-40.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-61


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-40: Removing the Base Plate

Removal (Type B3 and B4)


1. Using external circlip pliers, expand the circlip while pulling on the drive bush. The drive bush
will detach from the actuator center column with the circlip retained in its groove. See
Figure 5-41.

Figure 5-41: Removing the Circlip (Types B3 and B4)

Removal (Type B1)


1. The procedure for removal and refitting of the B1 drive bush is the same as for B3 and B4,
however the circlip is replaced with a custom spring circlip. The spring operates in the same
manner as the B3/B4 circlip but is expanded using long nose-pliers. See Figure 5-42.

Figure 5-42: Removing the Spring (Type B1)

5-62 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Mounting the Actuator


1. Ensure the valve is secure before fitting the actuator as the combination may be top heavy
and therefore unstable.

2. If it is necessary to lift the actuator using mechanical lifting equipment certified slings should
be attached as indicated in Fig. 6.2.1 for vertical shafts and Fig. 6.2.2 for horizontal shafts.

3. At all times trained and experienced personnel should ensure safe lifting particularly when
mounting actuators.

Caution!
Ensure the actuator is fully supported until full
valve shaft engagement is achieved and the
actuator is secured onto the valve flange.

4. A suitable mounting flange confirming to ISO 5210 or USA Standard MSS SP101 must be fitted
to the valve.

5. Actuator to valve fixing must confirm to Material specification ISO Class 8.8, yield strength 628
N/mm2.

6. Each assembly must be assessed on an individual basis for lifting.

Warning!
Do not lift the actuator and the valve
combination via the actuator. Always lift the
valve/actuator assembly via the valve.

Figure 5-43: Lift the actuator/valve assembly using the valve as shown, never lift by the actuator.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-63


MPD-READY® Product Manual

7. Ensure the actuator and valve are properly lubricated before use.

Caution!
If the actuator orientation when installed is
inverted (base up), additional oil is required to
ensure adequate lubrication. The user should
top up the oil by the quantity stated in the
Table 5-5 on page 5-36. Failure to do will cause
premature wear.

Figure 5-44: Additional oil may be needed, depending on orientation

Rising Stem Valves (Top Mounted)


1. Fit the machined drive bush into the thrust base as previously described, lower the actuator
onto the threaded valve steam, engage HAND operation and wind the hand wheel in the
open direction to engage the drive bush onto the stem.

2. Continue winding until the actuator is firmly down onto the valve flange.

3. Wind two further turns, fit securing bolts and tighten fully to the required torque indicated in
Table B.

Fitting Thrust Base to Valve Actuator


1. Fit the machined drive bush into the thrust base as previously described.

2. Remove the thrust base from the actuator, and place it on the threaded valve stem with the
slotted end of the drive bush uppermost and turn it in the open direction to engage the
thread.

3. Continue turning until the base is positioned onto the valve flange.

4. Fit the securing bolts, but do not tighten at this stage.

5-64 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

5. Lower the actuator onto the thrust base and rotate the complete actuator until the drive
dogs on the actuator output shaft engage into the drive bush. Actuator flange should now
be flush with the base.

6. Continue to turn actuator until fixing holes align. Using bolts supplied fix actuator to thrust
base and tighten down to required torque. See Figure 5-46.

Figure 5-45: Align Fixing Holes

7. Open valve by two turns and firmly tighten down onto valve flange to the required torque.
See Figure 5-47.

Torque ( ±10%)
Size
Nm lbs.ft
M8 13.8 9.8
M12 45.9 33.8
M16 101 74

Figure 5-46: Torque for Fasteners on Thrust Base

Metric Torque
Flange Fixing Nm lbs.ft
F10 M10 51.6 38
F14 M16 219.8 162.1
F16 M20 430.5 317.5
F25 M16 219.8 162.1
F30 M20 430.5 317.5
Imperial Torque
Flange Fixing Nm lbs.ft
3
FA10 /8 42.3 31.2
5
FA14 /8 205.3 151.4
3
FA16 /4 363.6 268.1
5
FA25 /8 205.3 151.4
3
FA30 /4 363.6 268.1

Figure 5-47: Torque for Valve Flange Fasteners

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-65


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Valve with Gearbox (Side Mounting)


Check that the mounting flange is at right angles to the input shaft, and that the drive bush fits
the shaft and key with adequate axial engagement. Engage HAND, offer up actuator to the
input shaft and turn handwheel to align keyway and key. Tighten mounting bolts to the required
torque indicated in Figure 5-47 on page 5-65.

Non-Rising Stem Valves (Top Mounting)


Treat as for side mounting except that when thrust is taken in the actuator, a thrust nut must be
fitted above the drive bush and securely tightened.

Handwheel Sealing
1. Ensure that the sealing cap and O-ring is fitted securely to ensure that moisture does not pass
down the center column of the actuator.

Figure 5-48: Sealing the Handwheel

2. For valves with rising spindles a cover tube may be fitted, this must also be sealed with an O-
ring and secured with cap screws.

Figure 5-49: Valve with Cover Tube

IQM Modulating Actuators


1. Consists of a lead screw assembly arrangement attached to the base of the actuator in order
to provide a linear output stroke between 8 mm

2. (3/4 in) minimum and 110 mm (4 1/4 in) maximum.

3. The IQL/IQML actuator can be supplied with or without a yoke mounting adaptor. The
adaptor consists of four pillars and a base flange to suit the valve.

5-66 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Figure 5-50: IQML with Yoke

Figure 5-51: IQML without Yoke

IQL & IQML Adjusting Linear Stroke


1. With the actuator securely fitted to the valve but with the linear drive disconnected, ensure
valve is at its fully closed (down) position.

2. Remove cover tube from actuator handwheel.

3. Locate the down stop adjustment on the linear drive unit. Using two wrenches, loosen the
lock nut, run the lock nut and tubular down stop counter-clockwise to the end of the thread.

Figure 5-52: Remove the cover tube from the handwheel

4. Turn the actuator handwheel clockwise. The linear drive will move down towards the valve
spindle and couple the linear drive to valve spindle.

5. Turn the tubular down stop clockwise into the actuator until it comes to a mechanical stop.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-67


MPD-READY® Product Manual

6. If the valve must close into its seat by TORQUE ACTION, then loosen the down stop (counter-
clockwise) by one third of one turn (equivalent to 1 mm).
a. Run the lock nut down onto the tubular down stop and tighten with two wrenches.

b. There is no UP STOP (open) on the linear drive unit, the mechanical stop in the valve will
give this position.
c. Refit the cover tube onto the handwheel ensuring the O-ring is fitted.

7. The linear drive unit is pre-packed with extreme pressure multi-purpose grease MULTIS MS2,
use this or an equivalent high temperature grease.

8. A grease nipple is situated in the base of the actuator to enable lubrication of the lead screw.

9. Periodically, depending on usage and temperature, apply two pumps of the grease gun.

Removing Terminal Cover


Using a 6 mm Allen key loosen the four captive screws evenly. Do not attempt to lever off the
cover with a screw driver this will damage the O-ring seal and may damage the flamepath on a
certified unit.

Figure 5-53: Removing Terminal Cover

The Rotork Bluetooth setting tool is packed separately, with the actuator, in the shipping box
identified with a yellow label.

The wiring code card fixed in the cover is particular to each actuator and must not be
interchanged with any other actuator. If in doubt check the serial number on the code card with
that of the actuator.

5-68 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Figure 5-54: Actuator Terminal Compartment and BTST

A plastic bag in the terminal compartment contains:

• Terminal screws and washers.

• Spare cover O-ring seal.

• Wiring diagram.

• Instruction book.

Cable Entry
Only appropriate certified explosion proof cable glands or conduit may be used in hazardous
locations. The cable entries in the actuator are tapped M25 x 1.5p or M40 x 1.5p.

In hazardous locations, only one appropriate certified Explosion-Proof thread adapter per entry
may be used.

1. Remove plastic transit plugs. Make cable entries appropriate to the cable type and size.

2. Ensure that threaded adapters, cable glands or conduit are tight and fully waterproof. Seal
unused cable entries with steel or brass threaded plug.

3. In hazardous areas an appropriate certified threaded blanking plug must be installed at the
cable entry without the use of an interposing thread adapter.

Figure 5-55: Cable Entry Figure 5-56: Cable Entry (Plastic Transit Plugs
Removed)

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-69


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Connecting to Terminals
Field wiring connections are by wire termination ring/spade tags. If necessary, suitable insulation
must be applied to bare metal ring/spade tags in order to ensure adequate separation between
'hazardous live' and non- hazardous' live circuits considering, and in accordance with, national
regulations and statutory provisions.

Tags are secured with the supplied 4 mm (control and indication) and 5 mm (power) pan head
screws.

To ensure secure electrical connection, it is important that the requisite washers are used as
shown in Figure 5-57. Failure to do so may result in connections working loose or screws not
clamping down on wire termination tags. Spring washers must be compressed. Screw tightening
torques must not exceed 1.5 Nm (1.1 lbf-ft).

Refer to the wiring diagram inside the terminal cover to identify functions of terminals. Ensure the
supply voltage is the same as that marked on the actuator nameplate.

Warning!
To comply with Ex e certification, terminals
numbered 1 - 3 and earth must be fitted with 1
off AMP ring tag 160292 per terminal and
terminals numbered 4 - 47 must be fitted with 1
off AMP ring tag 34148 per terminal when
required.

4 or 5 mm
Pan Head

Spring
washer

Plain
washers
Wire tag

Figure 5-57: Secured Electrical Connection

1. Remove power terminal guard.

2. Begin by connecting power cables and replace guard. When all connections are made
ensure wiring diagram is replaced in the terminal compartment.

5-70 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Warning!
Wiring can reach 80 °C in a 70 °C ambient
temperature. For safety reasons the same
voltage level must be connected to all the
actuator's indication terminals, remote input
terminals and digital I/O terminals (if
applicable).

Terminal Block Layout

Warning!
Ensure all power supplies are isolated before
removing actuator covers.

Figure 5-58: Terminal numbers refer to connections as shown on the actuator circuit diagram

Check that the supply voltage agrees with that stamped on the actuator nameplate.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-71


MPD-READY® Product Manual

A switch or circuit breaker must be included in the wiring installation or the actuator. The switch or
circuit breaker must meet the relevant requirements of IEC60947-1 and IEC60947-3 and be
suitable for the application. The switch or circuit breaker must not disconnect the protective
earth conductor. The switch or circuit breaker must be mounted as close to the actuator as
possible and shall be marked to indicate that it is the disconnect device for that particular
actuator. The actuator must be protected with overcurrent protection devices rated in
accordance with the applicable electrical data publication:

• PUB002-099 (3-phase actuators)

• PUB002-019 (single-phase actuators).

• PUB002-120 (3-phase modulating actuators)

• PUB002-121 (DC actuators)

Warning!
Actuators for use on phase to phase voltages
greater than 600 V must not be used on supply
systems such as floating, or earth-phase
systems, where phase to earth voltages in
excess of 600 VAC could exist.

Power supply cables must have sufficient mechanical protection properties to meet installation
requirements and be screened to comply with EMC requirements of the installed actuator.
Suitable methods include armoured and/or screened cables or cables contained within conduit.

Earth/Ground Connections
A lug with a 6.5 mm diameter hole is cast adjacent to the conduit entries for attachment of an
external protective earthing strap by nut and bolt. An internal earth connection is also provided
however it must not be used alone as the Protective Earth Connection.

Replacing Terminal Cover


Ensure cover O-ring seal and spigot joint are in good condition and lightly greased before refitting
cover.

Commissioning (Basic Settings)


All actuator settings, Datalogger and asset management data is accessed using the supplied
Rotork Bluetooth® Setting Tool Pro. Status and alarm data in addition to that shown on the home
screen can also be accessed.

5-72 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

THE CONTROL COVER MUST NOT BE REMOVED; NO USER CONFIGURABLE SETTINGS ARE AVAILABLE
WITHIN THE CONTROL ENCLOSURE. THE CONTROL COVER IS SEALED BY A QUALITY LABEL WHICH IF
BROKEN MAY INVALIDATE WARRANTY.

This instruction details the basic settings that must be completed before the actuator is put into
service.

ELECTRICAL OPERATION MUST NOT TAKE PLACE UNTIL THE BASIC SETTINGS HAVE BEEN MADE AND
CHECKED.

The basic settings affect the correct operation of the valve by the actuator. If the actuator has
been supplied with the valve, the valvemaker or supplier may have already made these settings.

Settings and operation must be verified by electric operation and function test of the actuated
valve.

THIS PUBLICATION PROVIDES INSTRUCTION ON MAKING THE BASIC SETTINGS ONLY.

For instruction on control and indication settings and for information on diagnostics refer to Rotork
PUB002-040.

Sensor Maintenance

Sensor Troubleshooting
The pressure, flow, and temperature sensors mounted on the MPD manifold are precision
instruments that are pre-calibrated for the specific purpose to which they are mounted. Contact
RIGLINE 24/7™ Support if sensor malfunction is suspected.

Error messages will be displayed on the LCD to notify users of serious problems affecting the
operation of the sensor. The LCD will display the error message until the error condition is
corrected. No other information is displayed during an alarm condition.

Three types of messages may be displayed:

Fail Messages: Fail messages inform the user of serious problems affecting the operation of the
transmitter. The LCD displays the message until the error condition is corrected. No other
information is displayed on the LCD while an error is present.

Warning Messages: Warning messages appear on the LCD. Warning messages alternate with
other transmitter information until the warning condition is corrected.

Operation Messages: Status messages.

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-73


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Table 5-10: Sensor Error Messages


Message Description Corrective Action
The sensor module is disconnected, Verify sensor cables are
Fail Module
or is malfunctioning. connected.
The transmitter electronics board is Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support to
Fail Elect malfunctioning due to an internal replace sensor and investigate
fault. error with electronics board.
A critical memory fault has been Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support to
Fail Config detected that could affect replace sensor and investigate
transmitter operation. error with memory fault.
Warning indicates that pressure
Press Limit Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support.
readings are outside sensor range.
Warning indicates that temperature
Temp Limit Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support.
readings are outside sensor range.
Warning indicates that transmitter is
Curr Fixed Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support.
in multidrop mode.
Warning indicates that pressure
Curr Saturd Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support.
readings are outside sensor range.
Warning indicates that a loop test is
Loop Test Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support.
in progress.
Warning that indicates that a non-
Xmtr Info critical memory fault has been Contact RIGLINE 24/7™ Support.
detected.
Indicates that zero value input has Displays during configuration with
Zero Pass
been accepted. transmitter tool.
Indicates that a zero value input has Displays during configuration with
Zero Fail
been denied. transmitter tool.
Indicates that a span value input Displays during configuration with
Span Pass
has been accepted. transmitter tool.
Indicates that a span value input Displays during configuration with
Span Fail
has been denied. transmitter tool.
Indicates that local zero and span
Local Dsbld No action needed.
adjustments have been disabled.
Indicates that security jumper is in
Write Protect No action needed.
the ON position.

5-74 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Connection Instructions
1. Connect the TREX leads to the transmitter with Red on + and Black on -. (For transmitters
manufactured by Emerson, see Figure 5-59. For transmitters from other manufacturers a
typical connection is shown in Figure 5-60.)

Figure 5-59: Emerson Figure 5-60: Other Manufacturers, ypic


connection shown.

2. Connect the leads to the TREX unit. If power is present on the transmitter, use the HART
connection (E). If power will be supplied to the transmitter from the TREX, use the HART+Pwr
connection (D). (Figure 5-61) Ensure that the plug is orientated such that the red terminials are
aligned and connected. (Figure 5-62)

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-75


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-61: Transmitter connections

Figure 5-62: Plug Orientation

Note: Examples in this document are assuming that power will be supplied to the transmitter.

3. Press and hold the power button to turn on the TREX. The display will flash briefly and then
return to black. That is the indication that the TREX is powering up and the button can be
released. (Figure 5-63)

5-76 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Figure 5-63: Power Button Location

4. Press Field Communicator. (Figure 5-64)

Figure 5-64: Field COmmunicator Icon

5. Press HART. (Figure 5-65)

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-77


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-65: HART Button

6. If power is present on the transmitter, press No. If power will be supplied to the transmitter from
the TREX, press yes (Figure 5-66)

Figure 5-66: Select Yes

Note: Examples in this document are assuming that power will be supplied to the transmitter.

7. Select Transmitter. (Figure 5-67)

5-78 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Figure 5-67: Select Transmitter

8. For Emerson transmitters, there will be a system health check, press configure. (Figure 5-68). If
not present for transmitters from other manufacturers, proceed to Step 9.

Figure 5-68: Select Configuration Icon

9. For Emerson Transmitters, Press Manual Setup (Figure 5-69). For transmitters from other
manufacturers, press Device setup. (Figure 5-70)

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-79


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-69: Select Manual Setup Figure 5-70: Select Device Setup

10. Press Basic Setup (Figure 5-71). For transmitters from other manufacturers, press Basic setup.
(Figure 5-72)

Figure 5-71: Select Basic Setup Figure 5-72: Select Basic Setup (Other Manufacturer
Configuration)

Setting Units
1. Press Pressure Units (Figure 5-73). For transmitters from other manufacturers, press Set output
range. (Figure 5-74)

5-80 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Figure 5-73: Select Pressure Units Figure 5-74: Select PV Unit

2. Select the desired units and press OK. (Figure 5-75)

Figure 5-75: Click OK

Setting Damping Value


1. Press Damping (Figure 5-76). For transmitters from other manufacturers, press PV Damp
(Figure 5-77).

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-81


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-76: For Emerson transmitters. Figure 5-77: For other manufacturers.

2. Type in the desired damping value and press OK (Figure 5-78)

Figure 5-78: Enter the Damping Value

Setting Range Values


1. Press Range Values (Figure 5-79). For transmitters from other manufacturers, press Set output
range (Figure 5-80).

5-82 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Figure 5-79: Select Range Values Figure 5-80: Select Set Output Range

2. Set Upper Range Value (URV) and Lower Range Value (URV) as required. For example
purposes the URV for pressure (Figure 5-81) and LRV for temperature (Figure 5-82)are
illustrated.

Figure 5-81: Select PR URV Figure 5-82: Select PV LRV

3. Verify that the correct value is being adjusted. Type in the new values as required. For
example purposes the URV for pressure (Figure 5-83) and LRV for temperature (Figure 5-84)
are illustrated. Press OK

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-83


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-83: Enter URV for Pressure Figure 5-84: Enter the LRV for Temperature

4. Verify that the correct Upper Range Value (URV) and Lower Range Value (URV) are set. If not,
repeat step 16 and step 17 to set the range values as required. Press OK. (Figure 5-83)

Figure 5-85: Press OK.

5. Press Send. (Figure 5-86)

5-84 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Figure 5-86: Select Send

6. Put control into Manual (Figure 5-87) and press OK.

Figure 5-87: Select OK

7. Press Send to send pending changes to device. (Figure 5-88)

Figure 5-88: Fig. 21

8. Press OK to return the transmitter to automatic control. (Figure 5-89)

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-85


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Figure 5-89: Press OK.

9. Press Disconnect. (Figure 5-90)

Figure 5-90: Select Disconnect

10. Remove the wire connections from the transmitter and replace the cap to ensure explosion
protection.

5-86 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

Disassembling/Assembling dpFlow Transmitters

2
3

4a
4
5 4b

Figure 5-91: dp Flow Transmitter and Flange Exploded Diagram

Table 5-11: Major Components of the dp Flow Sensor

Item Description
1 Transmitter
2 O-Rings
3 Manifold
4 Swagelok Fittings (Female
4a Female Swagelok Fitting Body
4b Female Swagelok Fitting Nut
5 Swagelok Fittings (Male)
6 Flange

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-87


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Disassembly
1. Bleed off all system pressure prior to starting disassembly of the transmitter.

2. Verify the orientation of the transmitter prior to disassembly. With flow direction from left to
right, the L port on the flange and the L port of the transmitter are on the near side.

L Port Indication
on Transmitter

L Port on Flange

Flow Direction
(Left to Right)

Figure 5-92: dpFlow Transmitter Orientation

3. Note the position of the valves prior to disassembly.

H-Side Sensor LCD


Bleed Port (Where Available)
(Normally Closed)
(Red)
L-Side
H-Side Bleed Port
Isolation Port (Normally Closed)
(Normally Open) (Red)
(Blue)

L-Side
Equalization Port Isolation Port
(Normally Closed) (Normally Open)
(Green) (Blue)
Figure 5-93: dpFlow Valves

5-88 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

4. Mark a line along each nut and fitting body with a suitable marking pen prior to disassembly.
This is important to ensure correct reassembly.

Figure 5-94: Mark Fittings

5. Loosen the two nuts on the Swagelok fittings (Item 4b in Figure 5-91) and separate the
Swagelok fittings (items 4 and 5) in order to slide off the transmitter assembly. A small amount
of liquid mud is anticipated to flow out as the connections are separated.

6. Turn the transmitter over and inspect the ports for clogging. Document the condition with
pictures. A flashlight may be needed to accurately capture details inside the ports.

Inspect
Ports

Note:
Do not Remove
the Fitting Body
or Fittings
From the Transmitter

Figure 5-95: Inspect Ports and Document Condition

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-89


MPD-READY® Product Manual

7. Separate the transmitter head from the manifold by undoing the 4 mounting bolts.

8. Take care not to damage the O-rings or the process isolating diaphragms. Inspect O-rings.
Replace if distorted, cracked, or damaged. See Figure 5-96.

9. Carefully clean the underside of the transmitter using atmospheric pressure water only. Note:
Using a high pressure water or air jet will damage the process isolating diaphragms.
Document any findings.

10. Document the condition with pictures.

Bolts

Manifold

Clean
Process Isolating Replace O-rings
Diaphragms if damaged.
with water.
HIGH PRESSURE WATER
WILL DAMAGE Transmitter
THE SENSOR

Figure 5-96: Inspect Ports

11. Open all ports of the manifold and flush out any residual drilling fluid or debris. Document any
findings.

Figure 5-97: Wash out manifold and document findings.

5-90 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

12. Remove the two male Swagelok fittings from the flange.

13. Use a rod to ensure that the H and L ports in the flange are not blocked by debris. Document
any findings.

H Port on Flange L Port on Flange

Figure 5-98: Clear Debris from Flange H and L Ports with a Rod

Assembly Instructions:
1. Position the O-Rings in the grooves and position the transmitter on the manifold, ensuring that
the H and L ports are oriented properly. See Figure 5-99.

2. Finger-tighten the bolts.

3. Torque the bolts to 150 IN.LBS (17 Nm) using a criss-cross pattern.

4. Torque the bolts to 300 IN.LBS (34 Nm) using a criss-cross pattern.

Ensure correct
orientation
H-Side L-Side
(L-Side Port
Ports Ports
Indicated)

Position O-rings
into grooves

Follow a criss-cross
Equalization pattern and torque
Port bolts incrementally
Figure 5-99: Attach the Manifold to the Transmitter

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-91


MPD-READY® Product Manual

5. Install the male Swagelok fittings in the flange.

Figure 5-100: Attach Male Swagelok fittings into the Flange

6. Align the H and L ports of the transmitter with the flange.

7. Slide the female Swagelok fittings (Item 4 in Figure 5-91) over the male Swagelok fittings (Item
5 in Figure 5-91) on the flange.

L Port Indicated
on Transmitter

Female Swagelok Fitting Body


L Port Indicated
on Flange (Nearside)
Female Swagelok Fitting Nut

Male Swagelok Fitting

Figure 5-101: Ensure Transmitter is Correctly Aligned with the Flange

8. While holding the fitting body (item 4a in Figure 5-91) steady with a wrench, rotate the nut
(item 4b in Figure 5-91) to the previously pulled up position as indicated by the marks on the
nut and fitting body.

5-92 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Maintenance

9. At this point there will be a significant increase in resistance. Tighten the nut (item 4b in
Figure 5-91) slightly.

10. Verify that the valves are in the correct position.

11. Verify the installation by pressure test of the next highest assembly as required.

H-Side
Bleed Port
(Normally Closed)
(Red)
L-Side
H-Side Bleed Port
Isolation Port (Normally Closed)
(Normally Open) (Red)
(Blue)

Equalization Port L-Side


(Normally Closed) Isolation Port
(Green) (Normally Open)
(Blue)

Figure 5-102: Normal Valve Position

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 5-93


MPD-READY® Product Manual

Storage Information

Long-term Storage
Take precautions to ensure that an excessive build-up of dust or any other contaminant does not
form on actuator.

Follow a routine operating schedule to operate actuator motor.

Storage Information
1. Disconnect manifold from rig piping.

2. Flush all ports and lines with water after use.

3. Apply a thin layer of grease to all sealing surfaces.

4. Cap connections of inlet and outlet ports.

5. Use blanking plugs to close all electrical and mechanical entries to protect surfaces from
damage during handling, storage, and shipping.

6. Protect the choke and/or valve stems to prevent drive-sleeve corrosion.

7. Add desiccant bags to enclosures to protect electrical components against condensation


during storage.

8. Store MPD-READY® manifold in a clean, dry environment, free from vibration and rapid
temperature changes.

9. If equipment is stored outside, store at sufficient elevation to avoid immersion in water, or


burial in snow.

10. Cover to prevent damage from side debris.

Actuator Storage
If your actuator cannot be installed immediately, store it in a dry place until you are ready to
connect incoming cables.

If the actuator has to be installed but cannot be cabled, it is recommended that the plastic
transit cable entry plugs are replaced with metal plugs which are sealed with PTFE tape.

The Rotork double-sealed construction will preserve internal electrical components perfectly if left
undisturbed. It is not necessary to remove any electrical compartment covers in order to
commission the IQ actuator.

Every Rotork actuator has been fully tested before leaving the factory to give years of trouble
free operation, providing it is correctly commissioned, installed and sealed.Rotork cannot accept
responsibility for deterioration caused on-site once the covers are removed.

5-94 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


Environmental
Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc.

End user advice on disposal at the end of life of the product. In all cases, check with local authority regulation before disposal.

EU Waste
Subject Definition Remarks / examples Hazardous Recyclable Disposal
Code
Lithium IQ battery Yes Yes 16 06 06 Will require special treatment before
Batteries disposal, use specialist recyclers or
Alkaline Setting tool Yes Yes 16 06 04 waste disposal companies
Electrical & Electronic Printed circuit boards All Products Yes Yes 20 01 35
Use specialist recyclers
Equipment Wire All Products Yes Yes 17 04 10
Glass Lens/Window IQ No Yes 16 01 20 Use specialist recyclers
Aluminium Gearcases and covers No Yes 17 04 02
Copper/Brass Wire, IQ gears, motor windings No Yes 17 04 01
Use licensed recyclers
Metals Zinc IQ clutch Ring and associated components No Yes 17 04 04
Iron/Steel Gears and bases No Yes 17 04 05
Mixed Metals IQ motor rotors No Yes 17 04 07
Glass filled nylon Covers, electronics chassis No No 17 02 04 Disposal as general commercial waste
Plastics
Unfilled Gears No Yes 17 02 03 Use specialist recyclers
Mineral & Kerosene Mixed Gearbox lubrication Yes Yes 13 07 03
Mineral Gearbox lubrication Yes Yes 13 02 04 Will require special treatment before
Oil /Grease disposal, use specialist recyclers or
Food Grade Gearbox lubrication Yes Yes 13 02 08 waste disposal companies
Grease Side Handwheel / linear drive Yes No 13 02 08
May require special treatment before
Rubber Seals & O-rings Cover and shaft sealing Yes No 16 01 99 disposal, use specialist waste disposal
companies

Figure 5-103: Environmental Recommendations for Disposal of Parts upon End of Life

Maintenance
5-95
MPD-READY® Product Manual

This page is left blank to properly sequence this document.

5-96 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


6
Parts

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 6-1


MPD-READY® Product Manual

This page is left blank to properly sequence this document.

6-2 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


MPD-READY

SUBSECTION 6: PARTS

CANDOC MPD MANUAL COPYRIGHT © 2016 CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD.


S/N MPD-005 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Canrig Drilling Technology Ltd.

Printed in the United States of America


SUBSECTION 6: PARTS LIST
Assembly Description Drawing Rev

AY23209 ASSY, FLANGE, DP FLOW AY23209 02


AY23210 ASSY,TRANSM, D PRESS, 6K EX IS 1/2" NPT AY23210 03
AY23222 ASSY,TRANSM, D PRESS, 10K EX IS 1/2" NPT AY23222 02
AY23415 ASSY, CHOKE AND ACTUATOR, CXT AY23415 01
AY23443 KIT, MPD READY INSTRUM, RIG SUB RIO NO DRAWING 0
AY23444 KIT,MPD READY SENSOR CABL,MP/RIG SUB RIO NO DRAWING 0
AY23669 ASSY, TRANSMITTER, TEMPERATURE AY23669 01
AY23742 KIT, MPD-READY, 600V NO DRAWING 0
AY23819 SLING, MPD MANIFOLD GEN2 AY23819 01
AY23888 MANIFOLD&SKID ASSY, MPD GEN2 5K AY23888 04
AY23889 ASSY, MANIFOLD&SKID, MPD GEN2 5K AY23889 02
AY23895 ASSY PLC REMOTE I/O ENCLOSURE, MPD GEN2 AY23895 01
AY23904 ASSY SERVO DRV/POWER DISC ENCL MPD GEN2 AY23904 01
AY23905 PLC REMOTE I/O ENCLOSURE MPD GEN2 NO DRAWING 0
AY23906 SERVO DRIVE/POWER DISC ENCL MPD GEN2 AY23906 01
AY23919 INSTRUMENTATION KIT (ON-SKID) AY23919 03
AY23942 DP ASSY, 5IN FIG 1002 7.5K AY23942 02
AY23943 INSTR KIT, OFF-SKID, MPD GEN2 PACE-X AY23943 02
AY23944 CONTROL HARDWARE KIT, MPD GEN2 600V NO DRAWING 0
AY23945 INSTR AND CONTR (OFF-SKID) PACE-X GEN2 NO DRAWING 0
AY23946 CONTROL HARDWARE, MPD GEN2.1 (ON-SKID) AY23946 02.RDL1
AY23947 I&C WIRING (ON-SKID) GEN2 NO DRAWING 0
AY23949 SERIAL NUMBER PLATE KIT, MPD GEN2 AY23949 01
AY23963 LABEL KIT, MPD GEN2 AY23963 02
AY23967 TRANSFORMER KIT, MPD GEN2 NO DRAWING 0
AY23968 ORIFICE FLG ASSY,DP FLOW,6IN,ANSI 150,5K AY23968 01
AY23975 KIT,SENSOR/INSTRUMENTATION, MPD OFF SKID NO DRAWING 0
AY23976 DP ASSY, 4IN FIG 1002 5K AY23976 02
AY24050 ASSY, TRANSM, PRESS, 5K EX IS 1/2" MNPT AY24050 02
AY24051 ASSY TRANS PRES 5K EX IS 1/2" MNPT PIGT AY24051 01
AY24186 ASSY, FLANGE, DP FLOW AY24186 02
AY24273 ASSY TRANS PRES 10K EX IS 1/2" MNPT PIGT AY24273 01

Wednesday, January 22, 2020 Serial Number MPD-005


AY24279 ASSY, 12 in, PENDANT ARM AY24279 A
AY24280 KIT, HMI, PENDANT ARM,12 in,FLAT VERT AY24280 A
AY24287 KIT, DRILL, PUNCH, MPD NO DWG 0
AY28908 JBOX,TERMINAL, MPD INSTRUMENTS, RIG SUB AY28908 A
AY28909 JBOX, TERMINAL, W/PIGTAILS AY28909 A

Wednesday, January 22, 2020 Serial Number MPD-005


Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23209
Description: ASSY, FLANGE, DP FLOW
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY23209 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA DT33149 FLANGE, ORIFICE, 4-1/16" RTJ, 5K


02 1.00 EA DT34763 ORIFICE, ECCENTRIC, 76MM
03 3.00 EA SH-M5-08MM-LP CAPSCR, HEX SOC HD, M5 x 08MM, LOW PROF
04 1.00 EA C10007 ANTI-SEIZE, COPPER BASED LUBRICANT

Printed: 3/27/2019
NO DRAWING FOUND IN EPDM
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23210
Description: ASSY,TRANSM, D PRESS, 6K EX IS 1/2" NPT
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY23210 Rev No: 03
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA N11374 TRANSM, DIFF PRESS, 6K EX IS 1/2" FNPT


02 2.00 EA H15-4000-08-08 ADAPTER, STR, -8 MSWAG, -8 MNPT
03 2.00 EA H15-4001-08-08 ADAPTER, STR, -8 FSWAG, -8 MNPT
04 1.00 EA E17418 GLAND, CABLE, M20,7.0-12.0mm,.28-.47 HAZ
06 0.10 EA TK1-51 SEAL, PIPE, C/W TEFLON, 50ML
REF 0.00 EA E16999 PLUG, M20, Exd, Exe, BRASS

Printed: 3/27/2019
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

4
7 7
1

6 6

1a
03

5 5
1b
03

4 4
FIRST TIME ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS: 03
1. ASSEMBLY OF TRANSMITTER IS DONE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH
INSTALLATION ON NEXT HIGHER LEVEL ASSEMBLY.
2. VERIFY THAT THE H AND L MARKINGS ON THE TRANSMITTER ARE
PER TRANSMITTER DRAWING.
3. INSTALL FEMALE FITTINGS (ITEM 3) IN THE TRANSMITTER MANIFOLD
USING SEALANT (ITEM 6).
4. INSTALL MALE FITTINGS (ITEM 2) INTO NHA USING SEALANT (ITEM 6).
3 5. ORIENTATE THE TRANSMITTER SO THAT H AND L MARKINGS MATCH 3 REASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS: 03 3
THE H AND L MARKINGS ON THE NHA. 3b
-INSTALL THE FEMALE FITTINGS (ITEM 3) ONTO THE MALE FITTINGS 03 1. DEPRESSURIZE THE SYSTEM PRIOR TO DISASSEMBLY
(ITEM 2) UNTILL THEY SEAT COMPLETELY AND TIGHTEN THE NUTS AND MARK A LINE ALONG THE NUT AND FITTING BODY
FINGER TIGHT. FLATS WITH A MARKING PEN.
6. MAKE A MARK ON EACH NUT (ITEM 3a) WITH A MARKING PEN AT 6 3a 2. WHILE HOLDING THE FITTING BODY (ITEM 3b) STEADY
O'CLOCK POSITION. WITH A WRENCH, ROTATE THE NUT TO THE PREVIOUSLY
7. WHILE HOLDING THE FITTING BODY (ITEM 3b) STEADY USING A PULLED UP POSITION, AS INDICATED BY THE MARKS ON
SUITABLE WRENCH, TIGHTEN EACH NUT FOR 1-1/4 TURN. THE NUT AND FITTING BODY.
8. VERIFY THAT THE MARK ON EACH NUT IS IN THE 9 O'CLOCK 3. AT THIS POINT THERE WILL BE A SIGNIFICANT
2 POSITION AFTER TIGHTENING. INCREASE IN RESISTANCE. TIGHTEN THE NUT SLIGHTLY. 2
9. ORIENTATE THE SENSOR HEAD (ITEM 1a) ACCORDING TO THE NHA 4. VERIFY INSTALLATION BY PRESSURE TEST OF THE
BY LOOSENING THE SETSCREW (ITEM 1b). RETIGHTEN THE SETSCREW NHA TO WORKING PRESSURE.
WHEN COMPLETE.
2
10. INSTALL THE GLAND (ITEM 4) AND PLUG (ITEM 5) IN THE
ORIENTATION PER THE NHA.
11. VERIFY INSTALLATION BY PRESSURE TEST OF THE NHA TO
WORKING PRESSURE.
INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED S.MINNIE 2017-09-25
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN J.Hinds 2017-12-01
CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1 PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994


INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
CHECKED -
APPROVED D.Spencer
-
2017-12-14
USE, REPRODUCTION
OR DISTRIBUTION
PER ASME Y14.8-1996

REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS


24" to 60"
60 to 120"
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
03 REVISE AND ADD REASSEMBLY NOTES AND SHOW DISPLAY HEAD WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED S.Minnie 2018-08-07 ASSY,TRANSM, D PRESS, 6K EX IS 1/2" NPT
02 ADD NOTES TO DRAWING PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 4.6 lbs DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018-08-23
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
01 PROTOTYPE RELEASE RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED - -
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:1 APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-08-23
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23210 REV 03
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE -

A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23222
Description: ASSY,TRANSM, D PRESS, 10K EX IS 1/2" NPT
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: AY23222 Rev No: 02
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA N11376 TRANSM, D PRESS REM, 10K EX IS 1/2" NPT


02 1.00 EA E14252 GLAND, CABLE, 1/2 NPT, 0.28-0.47 IN, Exe
03 1.00 EA E17449 PLUG, 1/2IN NPT, Exd, Exe, BRASS
04 2.00 EA H13860 NIPPLE 1/2IN NPTM-1/2IN NPTM 15K
05 4.00 EA H14029 PLUG, 1/4 NPTM, 15K
08 1.00 EA AY23683-010 CABLE, PIGTAIL, PLUG 6 PIN, 3TP SHD 10FT
09 30.00 EA E03-2000-010 CABLE TIE, 13.4 IN LG, 120 LB
10 0.10 EA TK1-51 SEAL, PIPE, C/W TEFLON, 50ML
11 0.00 EA ES10357 SCHEMATICS, MPD-READY KIT, OFF SKID

Printed: 3/27/2019
11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1

G A G

1F
1B

5
1D
5 1E
4
F F
1G 1A
1C 4

2
7
3
6
OPPOSITE 1E
FROM ITEM 2
E E
A
SECTION A-A
02 SCALE 1 : 2

6
02
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLY OF SENSOR IS DONE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH INSTALLATION ON NEXT HIGHER LEVEL ASSEMBLY.
D (REFER TO EMERSON DOCUMENT 00809-0100-4002, Rev DA, PAR 3.12 FOR MORE DETAIL.) 5 D
2. INSTALL PIGTAIL (ITEM 8), GLAND (ITEM 2) AND PLUG (ITEM 3) ON SENSOR HEAD (ITEM 1A) PER SCHEMATIC (ITEM 11). REFER TO NEXT
HIGHER LEVEL ASSEMBLY FOR DETAILS. 4
3. SEPARATE UPPER RTW FLANGES (ITEM 1B) FROM LOWER RTW FLANGES (ITEM 1C).
4. INSTALL NIPPLE (ITEM 4) INTO LOWER RTW FLANGES (ITEM IC) OF SENSOR USING SEALANT (ITEM 10). THE LOWER FLANGE HOUSING
INCLUDES A SMALL HOLE DESIGNED TO FACILITATE THIS PROCESS AND TO OBTAIN THE REQUIRED TORQUE LEVEL.
5. INSTALL PLUGS (ITEM 5) WITH SEALANT (ITEM 10).
6. INSTALL LOWER RTW FLANGES (ITEM IC) ON APPROPRIATE PORTS OF THE SPOOL (ITEM 6) USING SEALANT (ITEM 10). REFER TO NEXT
HIGHER LEVEL ASSEMBLY FOR DETAILS.
7. VERIFY GASKET (ITEM 1D) IS ALLOY 400 MATERIAL. ONLY EMERSON PART NUMBER DP0007-2403-M4 SHALL BE USED.
8. INSTALL SENSOR HEAD OF (ITEM 1A) ON PIPE USING SUITABLE HARDWARE. REFER TO NEXT HIGHER LEVER ASSEMBLY FOR DETAILS.
9. ENSURE THAT THE SEALING SURFACES OF THE LOWER FLANGE (ITEM 1C) AND UPPER FLANGE (ITEM 1B) ARE FREE FROM DIRT AND
C DEBRIS. C
10. PLACE THE GASKET (ITEM 1D) INTO THE GROOVE OF THE LOWER FLANGE HOUSING (ITEM IC).
11. STRAIGHTEN OUT THE CAPILLARIES (ITEM 1E) AND VERIFY THAT THEY ARE WITHOUT KINKS OR TWISTS. REFER TO NEXT HIGHER
LEVEL ASSEMBLY FOR ORIENTATION OF LO AND HI ENDS.
12. PLACE THE APPROPRIATE UPPER REMOTE SEAL FLANGE (ITEM 1B) ON TOP OF THE GASKET (ITEM 1D) OF THE APPROPRIATE LOWER
HOUSING FLANGE (ITEM 1C), ENSURING ALIGNMENT WITH THE LOWER HOUSING GROOVE AND THAT THE GASKET (ITEM 1D) IS NOT
PINCHED.
13. INSTALL BOLTS (ITEM 1F) AND NUTS (ITEM 1G) AND HAND TIGHTEN.
14. USING A TORQUE WRENCH ON THE NUT (ITEM 1G), TIGHTEN THE ASSEMBLY IN A CROSS-PATTERN TO ENSURE EVEN INSTALLATION.
THE LOWER FLANGE HOUSING INCLUDES A SMALL HOLE DESIGNED TO FACILITATE THIS PROCESS AND TO OBTAIN THE REQUIRED
TORQUE LEVEL AS FOLLOWS:
14.1. STARTING AT ANY POSITION, TIGHTEN TO 30 FT.LBS AND THEN MOVE CLOCKWISE SKIPPING TWO EACH TIME TO
B ACHIEVE A TIGHTENING PATTERN OF 1, 4, 7, 2, 5, 8, 3, 6. UNTIL ALL NUTS HAVE BEEN TIGHTENED. B
14.2 CHECK THE FLANGE GAP FOR UNIFORMITY THEN TIGHTEN IN THE SAME SEQUENCE AS ABOVE TO 70 FT.LBS.
14.3 CHECK THE FLANGE GAP FOR UNIFORMITY THEN CONTINUE TO TIGHTEN IN THE SAME SEQUENCE AS ABOVE TO 105 FT.LBS.
14.4 TIME PERMITTING, WAIT A MINIMUM OF FOUR HOURS AND REPEAT THE TORQUE PATTERN TO RESTORE ANY SHORT TERM SHEET 1 OF 1
CREEP / RELAXATION IN THE CONNECTION. THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
15. INSTALL THE SUPPORT CAGE (ITEM 7) USING SUITABLE HARDWARE. REFER TO NEXT HIGHER LEVEL ASSEMBLY FOR DETAILS.
16. POSITION PIGTAIL (ITEM 8) TOWARDS THE END OF THE SPOOL (ITEM 6). REFER TO NEXT HIGHER LEVEL ASSEMBLY FOR DETAILS. INITIAL DESIGN
WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
17. ZIP TIE (ITEM9 ) THE PIGTAIL (ITEM 8) AND CAPILLARIES (ITEM 1E) TO THE SUPPORT BAR OF THE CAGE (ITEM 7). MODELED S.Minnie 2018/02/07
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DRAWN
A.VILLARREAL 2018/02/07
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DO NOT SCALE
CONFIDENTIAL AND FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] CHECKED - -
PROPRIETARY. THE
INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-2009
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS 0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm APPROVED S.Minnie 2018/02/07 DRAWING
PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
USE, REPRODUCTION RELEASE DATE -
OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS
RUN OUT .003
60 to 120"
120" to 280"
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION D
SHEET SIZE
A WITHOUT PRIOR STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES 280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm MODELED A.Anbarasan 2019-02-01 A
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
WRITTEN CONSENT PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] ASSY, TRANSM, D PRESS, 10K, EX IS 1/2" NPT
.010 or as Shown DRAWN A.Anbarasan 2019-02-01
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
125 .xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm CHECKED
02 UPDATE ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS AND ADD VIEW FOR CLARITY RIGHTS RESERVED. MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm APPROVED S.Minnie 2019-02-01 EST. WEIGHT SCALE
MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX. ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° AY23222 REV 02
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN REVISION RELEASE DATE 2019-02-01 593.0 lbs 1:12
11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23415
Description: ASSY, CHOKE AND ACTUATOR, CXT
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: AY23415 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA AY23414 GANTRY, CORTEC CXT W TOLOMATIC ACTUATOR


02 1.00 EA AY23416 ASSY, ACTUATOR, TOLOMATIC SVC 7K
03 1.00 EA AY23413 CHOKE, CORTEC CXT 5K, 3.0" ID

Printed: 3/27/2019
A B C IF IN DOUBT.......PLEASE ASK! E F G

6 6

5 5

4
4

3 3

OUTLET 4 1/16" RTJ


5,000 PSI

2 2
INLET 4 1/16" RTJ
5,000 PSI

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED F.LNAME YYYY/MM/DD
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN A.VILLARREAL 2018/05/09
CONFIDENTIAL AND
PROPRIETARY. THE
INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] Material <not CHECKED - - 1
1 USE, REPRODUCTION
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
PER ASME Y14.8-1996
0 to 24"
24" to 60"
± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525
± 1 mm
± 3 mm
specified> APPROVED S.MINNIE 2018/05/09 DO NOT SCALE
OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS 60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE - DRAWING
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT IS STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm
EST. WEIGHT
MODELED - - ASSY, CHOKE AND ACTUATOR,
PROHIBITED. ALL MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC]
RIGHTS RESERVED.
PARALLELISM
FLATNESS
.010 IN 5 INCHES
.010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm 1956.7 lbs
DRAWN - -
-
CXT
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm
CHECKED -
125
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SCALE 1:8 APPROVED - -
MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX. ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE C REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-05-16 SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23415 REV 01

A B C IF IN DOUBT.......PLEASE ASK! E F G
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23443
Description: KIT, MPD READY INSTRUM, RIG SUB RIO
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: NO DRAWING Rev No: 0
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA AY28909 JBOX, TERMINAL, W/PIGTAILS


02 1.00 EA AY13859-75E CABLE, EXTENSION, 19C, IEEE, 75 FT
03 1.00 EA AY13859-5F ASSY CABLE,10 TP/SHIELD, RECEP,SOC,5 FT
04 1.00 EA E04-5022-010 LOCKNUT, GLAND, M20, NICKEL-PLATED BRASS
04A 1.00 EA E04-5004-010 GLAND, CABLE, M20, 19.0 - 25.5mm
R01 0.00 EA ES10150 SCHEMATICS, MPD SKID, GEN 2, 600V

Printed: 3/27/2019
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23444
Description: KIT,MPD READY SENSOR CABL,MP/RIG SUB RIO
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: NO DRAWING Rev No: 0
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 3.00 EA 202-00183-00AA CABLE, PIGTAIL, RW8 J-BOX SIGNAL CABLE


02 3.00 EA 202-00314-RW8A (INACTIVE) CABLE, 25 FT SENSOR EXT RW8
05 5.00 EA AY13860-100E ASSY CABLE, 5C SENSOR/SHLD 100 FT,EXT

Printed: 12/12/2019
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23669
Description: ASSY, TRANSMITTER, TEMPERATURE
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY23669 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA N11427 TRANSMITTER, TEMP, RTD AND THERMOWELL


02 1.00 EA E14254 GLAND, CABLE, 3/4 NPT, 0.23-0.47 IN

Printed: 3/27/2019
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

1
2.67 68
7 7

6 6

PLAN VIEW

2.67 68

5 5

2.71 69

4 4

2.48 63

10.12 257

8.84 225 8.84 225

3
3

4.92 125

2 2

SIDE VIEW
ELEVATION VIEW
INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED S.MINNIE 2017/09/27
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN A.VILLARREAL 2018/05/01
CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] CHECKED - -
PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS APPROVED S.MINNIE 2018/05/01
USE, REPRODUCTION PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS 60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED - - ASSY,TRANSM, TEMP, 300C EX IS 1/2" MNPT
PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 4.3 lbs DRAWN - -
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED - -
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:2 APPROVED - -
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23669 REV 01
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-05-03
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23742
Description: KIT, MPD-READY, 600V
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: NO DRAWING Rev No: 0
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

00 1.00 EA E15010 PLUG, RJ45, NICKEL, ATEX


00 1.00 EA E16765 END CAP, RJ45,PLUG NICKEL, ATEX
01 50.00 FT E14537 CABLE, CAT5, STRANDED, SHIELDED, 2 PAIR
02 1.00 EA N10306 REC, RJ45 TO RJ45, BULKHEAD PASSTHROUGH
03 1.00 EA N10307 END CAP, REC, RJ45, BULKHEAD
04 2.00 EA E13328 CONNECTOR, EZ-RJ45, SHIELDED
05 1.00 EA E15753 PLUG, RJ45, TWISTLOCK, FIELD ATTACHABLE
06 1.00 EA N10254 END CAP, PLUG, RJ45
07 2.00 EA E14539 CONNECTOR, RJ45, IP20
08 100.00 FT E14231 CABLE, CAT5, SHIELDED,STRANDED OUTDOOR
09 1.00 EA E17031 BUCKET, FCB, 15A, 600V, 35kA, SF 0.5
10 100.00 FT E17467 CABLE, 4C 10 AWG, SHIELDED, LAPP
11 1.00 EA 107104 RECEPTACLE,PNL MT,SZ 12,4 SKT,10AWG,II
12 1.00 EA E17727 PLUG, 4 PIN, 10 AWG, SIZE 12, .500-.625
R01 0.00 EA ES10357 SCHEMATICS, MPD-READY KIT, OFF SKID

Printed: 3/27/2019
SLING, MPD MANIFOLD GEN 2
NO BOM REQUIRED
A B C IF IN DOUBT.......PLEASE ASK! E F G

ROUTE CABLE UNDERNEATH BLOCKS AND VALVES


6 6
LEG A = 135" LEG B = 140"

5 5

47.25 1200

LEG D = 135" LEG C = 140"

63.75 1619
4
4

NOTE:
5/8" BLP‐401TTS 4‐legged bridle sling on 1‐1/4" A‐345 master
link subassembly with thimble eyes and ¾" G‐2130 Bolt style
anchor shackles each leg.
Shackles will have 0.89" diameter pins and 1.25" jaw opening
3
with the inside clear length of the shackle being 2.81" 3
SHACKLES TO INCLUDE LOCKING PINS SECURED BY MEANS OF
A LANYARD

Sling to be rated at 8.8 tons @ 30 degrees to vertical / 60


degrees to horizontal with leg lengths (including shackles):
A = 135"
B = 140" 2
2
C = 140"
D = 135"

Sling to include proof testing and tagging as per ASME B30.9


standards, including Part Number AY23819 and PO#
INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED S.Minnie 2017/08/16
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN S.MINNIE 2018-04-05
CONFIDENTIAL AND
PROPRIETARY. THE
INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] CHECKED 1
1 USE, REPRODUCTION
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
PER ASME Y14.8-1996
0 to 24"
24" to 60"
± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525
± 1 mm
± 3 mm
APPROVED D.SPENCER 2018-04-05 DO NOT SCALE
OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS 60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE - DRAWING
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT IS STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm
EST. WEIGHT
MODELED S.Minnie 2018-04-06 SLING, MPD MANIFOLD GEN2
PROHIBITED. ALL PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] DRAWN S.Minnie 2018-04-06
RIGHTS RESERVED. FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm 26914.9 lbs
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm
CHECKED
125
x.xx ± .13 mm SCALE 1:24 APPROVED D.Spencer 2018-04-06
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN Leg 3 MACHINED SURFACES
MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX. ANGULAR
.xxx ± .005"
MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE C REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-04-17 SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23819 REV 01

A B C IF IN DOUBT.......PLEASE ASK! E F G
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23888
Description: MANIFOLD&SKID ASSY, MPD GEN2 5K
Eng ID: 2
Drawing ID: AY23888 Rev No: 04
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 2.00 EA AY23415 ASSY, CHOKE AND ACTUATOR, CXT


02 4.00 EA F10358 FLANGE, BLANK, FLUID CUSH 4 1/16 5K,RTJ
03 4.00 EA F10362 FLANGE, BLANK, 4 1/16 5K, RTJ, 1/2NPT
04 1.00 EA M16704 ASSY, BLOCK STUD 4 1/16 5K, 5 WAY, PSL3
05 1.00 EA M16703 ASSY, BLOCK STUD 4 1/16 5K, 4 WAY, PSL3
06 1.00 EA M16706 ASSY, BLOCK STUD 4 1/16 5K, 5 WAY, PSL3
07 2.00 EA M16773 ASSY, BLOCK STUD 4 1/16 5K, 4 WAY, PSL3
08 2.00 EA DT34837 SPOOL, 4 1/16 5K RTJ, 21.68LG
09 1.00 EA F10359 FLANGE, FLUID CUSH 4 1/16 5K,RTJ, 1/2NPT
10 4.00 EA AY23209 ASSY, FLANGE, DP FLOW
11 1.00 EA F10360 ADAPTER SPOOL, 4 1/16 5K X 4", 1002 WING
12 1.00 EA F10361 ADAPTER SPOOL, 4 1/16 5K X 4", 1002 THRD
13 1.00 EA DT34835 ELBOW, 4 1/16" 5K RTJ
14 1.00 EA AY24254 MPD SKID ASSEMBLY
15 1.00 EA AY23893 ASSY, FLANGE SPACER 4 1/16 5K RTJ 1/2NPT
16 1.00 EA DT52232 FIBER GRATING
17 1.00 EA DT34897 FLANGE, BLANK, 4 1/16 5K, RTJ, 1/2 NPT
18 1.00 EA M16705 ASSY, BLOCK STUD 4 1/16 5K, 4 WAY, PSL3
19 1.00 EA AY23216 VALVE, GATE, ELECTRIC, 4-1/16" 5K
20 1.00 EA AY23216 VALVE, GATE, ELECTRIC, 4-1/16" 5K
21 2.00 EA AY23216 VALVE, GATE, ELECTRIC, 4-1/16" 5K
22 1.00 EA AY23216 VALVE, GATE, ELECTRIC, 4-1/16" 5K
27 1.00 EA AY24186 ASSY, FLANGE, DP FLOW

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1

7
1. DESIGN CODE: API-6A, PSL-3, PR-1
G 2. MAXIMUM WORKING PRESSURE: 5,000 PSI G
3. TEMPERATURE RATING: -20 F TO 250 F (P+U)
13 4. MATERIALS CLASS: DD-1.5, NACE MR 0175
16 10 5. STAMP LIFTING LUGS AS SHOWN
9 6. PAINT PER NABORS OPS-076, LAND USE
04 MANIFOLD - RED
6
SKID - GREY
A LIFTING LUGS - SAFETY YELLOW
B
15 19
14 7
F F

1
22
27

8
19
E E

DT34897 added
DT34208 removed 17
NOTE 45DEG
LOCATION OF 2
D C PORTS 04 4

2X CHOKE AND
TORQUE TO 686 ACTUATOR FREE
D ft.lbs (TYP) 04 04 ISSUE 20 5 D
1
11

OUTLET 4" FIG


1002 MALE (WING)

C C
04
27

12

INLET 4" FIG1002


FEMALE (THREAD)

B B

DATA BOOK TO BE PROVIDED ELECTRONICALLY TO Canrig [email protected], LABELED PER SERIAL NUMBER, AS FOLLOWS: SHEET 1 OF 1
1. COC TO API-6A, NACE MR0175/ISO 15156, PSL-3, PR-1, DD-1.5, P+U. THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
2. NON DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATIONS
3. MAGNETIC PARTICLE / PENETRANT INSPECTIONS INITIAL DESIGN
4. ULTRASONIC TEST / INSPECTIONS WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
MODELED A.Villarreal 2018-05-24
5. MATERIAL TRACEABILITY, HARDNESS, HEAT TREATMENT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018-05-24
DO NOT SCALE
CHECKED
6. HYDROSTATIC TEST REPORTS CONFIDENTIAL AND INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS 0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-05-24 DRAWING
PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
USE, REPRODUCTION RELEASE DATE -
04
ADD DPFLOW AT INLET, RELOCATE DOWNSTREAM DPFLOWS, ADD PRESSURE
PORTS OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS
.003
60 to 120"
120" to 280"
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION D
SHEET SIZE
A A
RUN OUT
03 ORIENTATION OF GATE VALVE ACTUATORS, NOTES WITHOUT PRIOR STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES 280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm MODELED A.Anbarasan 2019-01-16
WRITTEN CONSENT PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
.010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] ASSY, MANIFOLD&SKID, MPD 5K BUYOUT
02 ADD DT34897, REMOVE DT34208, SWITCH THREAD AND WING CONNECTIONS
PARALLELISM DRAWN A.Anbarasan 2019-01-16
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
RIGHTS RESERVED.
125 .xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm CHECKED F.LNAME YYYY/MM/DD
01 DRAFT FOR QUOTING .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm APPROVED S.Minnie
MACHINED SURFACES 2019-01-21 EST. WEIGHT SCALE
MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX. ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° AY23888 REV 04
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN REVISION RELEASE DATE 2019-01-22 17078.2 lbs 1:24
11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23889
Description: ASSY, MANIFOLD&SKID, MPD GEN2 5K
Eng ID: 2
Drawing ID: AY23889 Rev No: 02
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

00 1.00 EA AY23919 INSTRUMENTATION KIT (ON-SKID)


01 1.00 EA AY23888 MANIFOLD&SKID ASSY, MPD GEN2 5K
03 1.00 EA AY23946 CONTROL HARDWARE, MPD GEN2.1 (ON-SKID)
04 1.00 EA AY23949 SERIAL NUMBER PLATE KIT, MPD GEN2
05 1.00 EA AY23819 SLING, LIFTING, MPD MANIFOLD
06 1.00 EA AY23963 LABEL KIT, MPD GEN2
REF 0.00 EA 18-008 MPD MANIFOLD FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST
REF 0.00 EA ES10150 SCHEMATICS, MPD SKID, GEN 2, 480V/600V

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

R55.00 1397
48.00 1219 MINIMUM
7 MINIMUM MAINTENANCE 7
MAINTENANCE CLEARANCE
CLEARANCE REQUIRED
REQUIRED

6 6

5 1 5
5 1

(SLING REF.)
11.25 286 1
MINIMUM
MAINTENANCE
CLEARANCE
4 REQUIRED 4
18 457

OUTLET
4" 1002 WING
1
3
3 3

83 2113

INLET
4" 1002 THREAD

2 2
4

122 3099 84 2133

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
1 OPTIONAL CONFIGURATION: MODELED A.Villarreal
DRAWN A.Villarreal
2018-07-31
2018-07-31
INLET CONNECTION AND TEMPERATURE FLANGE MAY BE SWAPPED CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL
1 PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
CHECKED
APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-08-27
USE, REPRODUCTION
OR DISTRIBUTION
PER ASME Y14.8-1996

REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS


24" to 60"
60 to 120"
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED A.Anbarasan 2019-01-29 ASSY, CHOKE MANIFOLD, MPD 5K
02 VISUAL UPDATE FOR RELOCATED INSTRUMENTATION PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 18,000 lbs DRAWN A.Anbarasan 2019-01-29
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
01 INITIAL REVISION RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:24 APPROVED S.Minnie 2019-01-29
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23889 REV 02
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE 2019-01-29

A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23895
Description: ASSY PLC REMOTE I/O ENCLOSURE, MPD GEN2
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY23895 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA AY23905 PLC REMOTE I/O ENCLOSURE MPD GEN2


02 1.00 EA E13953 HOLE FILLER, Exe Exd, M25, NP-BRASS
03 3.00 EA E14414 LOCKNUT, GLAND, M25, NICKEL-PLATED BRASS
04 1.00 EA E18803-25 SEALING RING, GLAND, M25, GREEN FIBER
05 7.00 EA E14404-1 GLAND,CABLE,M25, 10 - 16.0mm,.4-.63, KIT
06 2.00 EA E11318 REDUCER, 25MM(M) X 20MM(F)
07 14.00 EA E17418-1 GLAND, CABLE,M20,7.0-12.0mm,.28-.47, KIT
08 2.00 EA E16766 REC, JAMNUT, RJ45, NICKEL, ATEX C1D2
09 2.00 EA E16767 END CAP, RJ45,RECEPT JAMNUT, ATEX C1D2
10 2.00 EA E13359 HOLE FILLER, Exe Exd, M20, NP-BRASS
11 3.00 EA E18803-20 SEALING RING, GLAND, M20, GREEN FIBER
12 3.00 EA E04-5022-010 LOCKNUT, GLAND, M20, NICKEL-PLATED BRASS
13 4.00 EA HH-0250NC-0125-SS CAPSCR, HEX HD, 1/4-20 UNC X 1.25,SS
14 4.00 EA FW-0250-A WASHER, F, 1/4, PLAIN, TYPE A
15 8.00 EA LW-0250-HS-SS LOCKWASHER, 1/4 HELICAL SPRING, SS
16 4.00 EA HN-0250NC-GR8 HEX NUT, 1/4-20UNC, GR8
17 1.00 EA E04-5004-010 GLAND, CABLE, M20, 19.0 - 25.5mm

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23904
Description: ASSY SERVO DRV/POWER DISC ENCL MPD GEN2
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY23904 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

00 2.00 EA E04-5003-020 GLAND, CABLE, M25, 13.5 - 20.0mm


01 1.00 EA AY23906 SERVO DRIVE/POWER DISC ENCL MPD GEN2
02 2.00 EA E14404-1 GLAND,CABLE,M25, 10 - 16.0mm,.4-.63, KIT
03 12.00 EA E11318 REDUCER, 25MM(M) X 20MM(F)
04 12.00 EA E14414 LOCKNUT, GLAND, M25, NICKEL-PLATED BRASS
05 7.00 EA E18803-20 SEALING RING, GLAND, M20, GREEN FIBER
06 7.00 EA E14402 GLAND, CABLE, M20, 8.5 - 16.0mm
07 1.00 EA E17354-1 GLAND,CABLE,M20,10.0-16.0mm, .4-.63, KIT
08 4.00 EA E17418-1 GLAND, CABLE,M20,7.0-12.0mm,.28-.47, KIT
09 3.00 EA E13953 HOLE FILLER, Exe Exd, M25, NP-BRASS
10 3.00 EA E18803-25 SEALING RING, GLAND, M25, GREEN FIBER
11 4.00 EA HH-0500NC-0300-GR8 CAPSCR, HEX HD, 1/2-13UNC x 3.00, GR8
12 4.00 EA FW-0500-A-SS WASHER, F, 1/2, PLAIN, TYPE A, SS
13 8.00 EA LW-0500-HS LOCKWASHER, 1/2 HELICAL SPRING
14 8.00 EA HN-0500NC-GR8 HEX NUT, 1/2-13UNC, GR8
R01 1.00 EA E18955 REC, EX, 4 SOC, 10 AWG, INLINE
R02 1.00 EA E18956 PLUG, EX, 4 PIN, 10 AWG
R05 20.00 FT E03-1020-010 CABLE, 4 C #10 AWG, EXANE, 600V

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23905
Description: PLC REMOTE I/O ENCLOSURE MPD GEN2
Eng ID: 2
Drawing ID: AY23905 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 0.00 EA E19014 CONTROL BOX, HINGED COVER, CAM LOCK


02 3.00 EA N11387 INPUT, ANALOG, 8 CH, VOLT/CURR, 5069
03 6.00 EA N11388 TERMINAL, REMOVABLE, 5069 I/O, SPRING
04 1.00 EA N11389 OUTPUT, DIGITAL, 16 CH, 0.5A, 5069
05 2.00 EA N11385 INPUT, DIGITAL, 16CH, 24VDC SINK, 5069
06 1.00 EA N10878 ETAP, DLR, 3 COPPER PORTS
07 1.00 EA N11390 ADAPTER, ETH/IP, DUAL PORT, SLIM, 5069
08 1.00 EA N11391 TERMINAL, REMOVABLE, 5069 ADPTR, SPRING
09 0.00 METER E13849 COVER, WIRE DUCT, PLASTIC, GRAY, 1 IN
10 0.00 FT E12378 COVER, WIRE DUCT, PLASTIC, GRAY, 1.5 IN
11 0.00 FT E19008 ZINC/STEEL DIN RAIL (35mm x 15mm x 1m)
12 0.00 EA E17413 END CLAMP, BRACKET, 35mm RAIL
13 0.00 EA E18972 3LVL INITIATOR TERM BLOCK - DIKD 1,5 BU
14 0.00 EA E18973 END COVER - D-UT 2,5/10
15 0.00 EA E18974 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK - UT 2,5-PE
16 0.00 EA E18975 TERMINAL BLOCK - UT 2,5
17 1.00 EA E18950 BATTERY,UPS,24VDC,120WH,QUINT,LI-ION
18 1.00 EA E18949 UPS,QUINT,24VDC INPUT/OUTPUT, 10A
19 1.00 EA E18945 POWER SUPPLY, 24VDC, 10A, 3 PH, QUINT
20 8.00 EA E15736 CIRCUIT BKR, MINI, 6A,24VDC, NC CONTACT
22 0.00 EA N11395 BARRIER, IS, 2CH, POWERED
23 0.00 EA E19015 PE-RAIL - 18 POSITIONS - 4 SQMM
24 0.00 EA E19016 N/FE/PA-RAIL - 9 POSITIONS - 4 SQMM

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23906
Description: SERVO DRIVE/POWER DISC ENCL MPD GEN2
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: AY23906 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 0.00 EA E19001 ROTARY DRIVE MECHANISM FOR Exd ENCLOSURE


02 0.00 EA E18996 SWITCH, TRANSFER/DISCONNECT 3-POLE
03 0.00 EA E18997 MOTOR STARTER PROTECTOR, 4.5-6.3 AMPS
04 0.00 EA E18999 ROTARY ACTUATOR, LOCKABLE
05 0.00 EA E19000 ATTACHMENT FOR SWITCH/BREAKER
06 0.00 EA E18998 MOTOR STARTER PROTECTOR, 11-16 AMPS
07 0.00 EA E19002 EMPTY ENCLOSURE, SCREW COVER
08 0.00 EA E19003 FRAME 8125 SIZE 907-722X251 WITH SEAL
09 0.00 EA E19004 EMPTY ENCLOSURE, EXPLOSION PROOF
10 2.00 EA N11383 SERVO DRIVE, LINE REACTOR 8A
11 2.00 EA N11379 SERVO DRIVE, KINETIX 5500, 12.5 A PEAK
12 2.00 EA N11380 KIT, KINETIX5500,HIPERFACE T CONVERTER
13 0.00 EA E19005 POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
14 0.00 EA E17413 END CLAMP, BRACKET, 35mm RAIL
15 0.00 EA E18973 END COVER - D-UT 2,5/10
16 0.00 EA E18974 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK - UT 2,5-PE
17 0.00 EA E18975 TERMINAL BLOCK - UT 2,5
18 0.00 EA E19006 UNIVERSAL GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK
19 0.00 EA E19007 UNIVERSAL TERMINAL BLOCK - UT 35
20 0.00 FT E19008 ZINC/STEEL DIN RAIL (35mm x 15mm x 1m)
21 0.00 EA E19009 PE-RAIL - 21 POSITIONS - 3x50 SQMM 18X4
22 0.00 EA E19010 PE-RAIL - 9 POSITIONS - 3x50 SQMM 6x10

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23919
Description: INSTRUMENTATION KIT (ON-SKID)
Eng ID: 2
Drawing ID: AY23919 Rev No: 03
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 5.00 EA AY23210 ASSY,TRANSM, D PRESS, 6K EX IS 1/2" NPT


02 5.00 EA AY24050 ASSY, TRANSM, PRESS, 5K EX IS 1/2" MNPT
03 1.00 EA AY23669 ASSY, TRANSMITTER, TEMPERATURE

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

7 7

6 6
1 2 2 1 2 1 03 1
2
03

5 5

1 1
1 1

03 03
4 4

3 3

1 03 2
03
2 3 2

2 NOTE: POSITION SENSOR HEADS TOWARDS INLET AND OUTLET CONNECTIONS 2

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED A.Villarreal 2018/06/05
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018/06/05
CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1 PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994


INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
CHECKED -
APPROVED S.Minnie
-
2018/06/05
USE, REPRODUCTION
OR DISTRIBUTION
PER ASME Y14.8-1996

REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS


24" to 60"
60 to 120"
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE 2018/06/05
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
03 REPOSITION SENSORS DUE TO FLANGE RELOCATION WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED A.Anbarasan 2019-01-29 INSTRUMENTATION KIT (ON-SKID)
02 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER MOVED & LABELS REMOVED PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 14 lbs DRAWN A.Anbarasan 2019-01-29
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
01 PROTOTYPE RELEASE RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED S.Minnie 2018/12/06
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:8 APPROVED S.Minnie 2019-01-29
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23919 REV 03
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE 2019-01-29

A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23942
Description: DP ASSY, 5IN FIG 1002 7.5K
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY23942 Rev No: 02
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA AY23222 ASSY,TRANSM, D PRESS, 10K EX IS 1/2" NPT


02 1.00 EA DT34872 CAGE, PROTECTION, DP 5IN
03 1.00 EA DT34223 PIPE DP WELDMENT, 5IN FIG 1002 7500 PSI
04 1.00 EA DT34873 PLATE LABEL AY23942
05 14.00 EA HH-0375NC-0075-SS CAPSCR, HEX HD, 3/8-16UNC x 0.75, SS
06 14.00 EA LW-0375-HS-SS LOCKWASHER, 3/8 HELICAL SPRING, SS
08 4.00 EA ST-0008-32-050 SCREW, SELF TAPPING, #8 x 0.50 LG, HEX
09 1.00 EA DT34875-025 LABEL, DP VERTICAL DENSITY IN
REF 0.00 EA DOC10255 FAT & PRESSURE TEST- 7500 PSI
REF 0.00 EA F10096 PLUG, BLANK, BULL, MALE, 2", FIG. 1502
REF 0.00 EA F10375 PLUG, BULL, MALE, 5IN, FIG. 1002 1/2"NPT
REF 0.00 EA F10376 PLUG, BULL, FEM, 5IN, FIG. 1002 1/2"NPT

Printed: 3/27/2019
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

7 7

ROUTE PIGTAIL TO LO END OF CAPILLARY 02


6 5
7
6 6 5 2 6

LO END OF CAPILLARY

6 5

5 02 6 5 5
1
9
4

4 4

6 5
6 5 1
6 5

2
(PROTECTION CAGE NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) 4 8
3
3
3 2

HI END OF CAPILLARY

2 2
3

VIEW AT NAMEPLATE
SCALE 1:4
INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED S.Minnie 2018/05/31
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018/05/31
CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] CHECKED - -
PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS APPROVED S.Minnie 2018/05/31
USE, REPRODUCTION PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS 60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED A.Anbarasan 2018-11-06 DP ASSY, 5IN FIG 1002 7.5K
02 ADD LABEL PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 900 LBS DRAWN A.Anbarasan 2018-11-06
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
01 INITIAL DESIGN RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED - -
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:8 APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-11-06
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23942 REV 02
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-11-08
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23943
Description: INSTR KIT, OFF-SKID, MPD GEN2 PACE-X
Eng ID: 2
Drawing ID: AY23943 Rev No: 02
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 3.00 EA AY23968 ORIFICE FLG ASSY,DP FLOW,6IN,ANSI 150,5K


02 1.00 EA AY23976 DP ASSY, 4IN FIG 1002 5K
03 1.00 EA AY23942 DP ASSY, 5IN FIG 1002 7.5K
04 3.00 EA AY24273 ASSY TRANS PRES 10K EX IS 1/2" MNPT PIGT
05 1.00 EA DT34896 ELBOW, DP, WELDMENT, 4IN FIG 1002 5K
06 1.00 EA F10336 PLUG,GUAGE,1/2NPT,BULL,MALE,2",FIG 1502
07 1.00 EA AY24051 ASSY TRANS PRES 5K EX IS 1/2" MNPT PIGT
08 1.00 EA DT34875-019 LABEL, MUD PUMP #1 DP FLOW IN
09 1.00 EA DT34875-020 LABEL, MUD PUMP #2 DP FLOW IN
10 1.00 EA DT34875-021 LABEL, MUD PUMP #3 DP FLOW IN
11 R 0.00 EA DT34875-025 LABEL, DP VERTICAL DENSITY IN
12 R 0.00 EA DT34875-027 LABEL, DP VERTICAL DENSITY OUT
13 1.00 EA DT34875-022 LABEL, STANDPIPE PRESSURE 1
14 1.00 EA DT34875-023 LABEL, STANDPIPE PRESSURE 2
15 1.00 EA DT34875-024 LABEL, STANDPIPE PRESSURE 3
16 1.00 EA DT34875-026 LABEL, RCD PRESSURE

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

7 7

1 1 1

7 8 9

6 6

A
10

5 5

3
A
SECTION A-A

4 4 4
4 6 4

15
12 13 14

16
3
3
B 11

B
2 SECTION B-B
2 2

NOTE: ALL ITEMS SHIPPED LOOSE. 5

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED A.Villarreal 2018/08/14
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018/08/14
CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] - CHECKED - -
PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS APPROVED S.Minnie 2018/08/23
USE, REPRODUCTION PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS 60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED A.Villarreal 2018/08/23 INSTRUMENT KIT, OFF-SKID, MPD GEN2 PACE-X
02 VIEW UPDATE PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] - DRAWN A.Anbarasan 2018-12-06
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
01 INITIAL REVISION RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED S.Minnie 2018/12/06
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:12 APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-12-06
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23943 REV 02
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-12-06
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23944
Description: CONTROL HARDWARE KIT, MPD GEN2 600V
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: NO DRAWING Rev No: 0
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

00 1.00 EA AY23742 KIT, MPD-READY, 600V


00 1.00 EA AY23975 KIT,SENSOR/INSTRUMENTATION, MPD OFF SKID

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23945
Description: INSTR AND CONTR (OFF-SKID) PACE-X GEN2
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: NO DRAWING Rev No: 0
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

00 1.00 EA AY23943 INSTR KIT, OFF-SKID, MPD GEN2 PACE-X


00 1.00 EA AY23944 CONTROL HARDWARE KIT, MPD GEN2 600V
00 1.00 EA AY24280 KIT, HMI, PENDANT ARM,12 in,FLAT VERT
00 1.00 EA AY24287 KIT, DRILL, PUNCH, MPD
REF 0.00 EA 18-025 MPD OFF-SKID FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

Printed: 3/27/2019
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23946
Description: CONTROL HARDWARE, MPD GEN2.1 (ON-SKID)
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY23946 Rev No: 02.RDL1
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

03 1.00 EA AY23967 TRANSFORMER KIT, MPD GEN2


04 1.00 EA AY23895 ASSY PLC REMOTE I/O ENCLOSURE, MPD GEN2
04 1.00 EA E18632 TRAY, CABLE, LADDER, ALUM, 2 x 12 x 144
05 1.00 EA AY23904 ASSY SERVO DRV/POWER DISC ENCL MPD GEN2
09 2.00 EA DT52230 CABLE TRAY SUPPORT
10 2.00 EA FW-0625-A WASHER, F, 5/8, PLAIN, TYPE A
11 2.00 EA LW-0625-HS LOCKWASHER, 5/8 HELICAL SPRING
12 2.00 EA HH-0625NC-0100-GR8 CAPSCR, HEX HD, 5/8-11UNC x 1.00, GR8
13 5.00 EA HH-0250NC-0088-SS CAPSCR, HEX HD, 1/4-20UNC X 0.88, SS
14 14.00 EA FW-0250-A-SS WASHER, F, 1/4, PLAIN, TYPE A, SS
15 7.00 EA LW-0250-HS-SS LOCKWASHER, 1/4 HELICAL SPRING, SS
16 7.00 EA HN-0250NC-GR8 HEX NUT, 1/4-20UNC, GR8
17 2.00 EA HH-0250NC-0125-SS CAPSCR, HEX HD, 1/4-20 UNC X 1.25,SS
REF 1.00 EA AY23947 I&C WIRING (ON-SKID) GEN2
REF 0.00 EA ES10150 SCHEMATICS, MPD SKID, GEN 2, 480V/600V

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

7 7

6 9 4 6
6

4 5

5 5

3
5
3

4 4

10 11 12
13 14 15 16

4 3
9

6 12 11 10

3
9
10 11 12 3
9

12 11 10 13 14 15 16

6
9

5
2 2
3
17 14 15 16

04

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
PROTOTYPE CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL
MODELED A.Villarreal
DRAWN A.Villarreal
2018-06-05
2018-06-25
1 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] Material <not CHECKED - -
PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994
DATE: 18/07/26 BY: SM USE, REPRODUCTION
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
PER ASME Y14.8-1996
0 to 24"
24" to 60"
± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525
± 1 mm
± 3 mm
specified> APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-06-25
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
OR DISTRIBUTION 60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE -
REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED A.Villarreal 2018-07-26 CONTROL HARDWARE, MPD GEN2.1 (ON-SKID)
PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 23591.7 lbs DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018-07-26
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
02 REVISE MODEL AND DRAWING RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED - -
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:2 APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-07-27
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23946 REV 02
REV 02.RDL1
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE -
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23947
Description: I&C WIRING (ON-SKID) GEN2
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: NO DRAWING Rev No: 0
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

00 20.00 FT E03-1023-010 CABLE, 4 C #16 AWG, EXANE, 600V


00 10.00 FT E03-1034-010 CABLE, 10 C #16 AWG, 600V, GENERIC
00 10.00 EA E04-5003-020 GLAND, CABLE, M25, 13.5 - 20.0mm
00 50.00 FT E11035 CABLE, 1 C #6 AWG, MTW, GRN/YEL
00 2.00 EA E11160 CABLE, PATCH, CAT5E, 3 FT
00 2.00 EA E14254 GLAND, CABLE, 3/4 NPT, 0.23-0.47 IN
00 2.00 EA E14255 GLAND, CABLE, 3/4 NPT, 0.33-0.63 IN
00 35.00 FT E14537 CABLE, CAT5, STRANDED, SHIELDED, 2 PAIR
01 50.00 FT E18954 CABLE, 5 TP #24 AWG, 300V, SHLD
02 50.00 FT E11204 CABLE, 4 C, 14 AWG AND 1 TSP, 16 AWG
03 100.00 FT E03-1022-010 CABLE, 4 C #14 AWG, 600V, GENERIC
04 100.00 FT E03-1034-010 CABLE, 10 C #16 AWG, 600V, GENERIC
05 230.00 FT E03-1035-030 CABLE, 1 TSP, 20 AWG, BLUE HOSE, ARCTIC
06 13.00 EA E15641 TUBING,HEAT SHRINK,3/4 x 48",BLUE

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23949
Description: SERIAL NUMBER PLATE KIT, MPD GEN2
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: AY23949 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA DT34845 PLATE, SERIAL NUMBER, MPD, TEMPLATE


02 4.00 EA ST-0008-32-050 SCREW, SELF TAPPING, #8 x 0.50 LG, HEX

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


A B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E

4
4

2 1

3
3

2
2

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED A.VILLARREAL 2018-05-29

CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL
INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] $PRPSHEET:{
DRAWN
CHECKED
A.VILLARREAL
-
2018-06-25
-
1
PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS 0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm MATERIAL}
USE, REPRODUCTION APPROVED S.MINNIE 2018-06-25
PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
RELEASE DATE - DO NOT SCALE
OR DISTRIBUTION
WITHOUT PRIOR
REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS
RUN OUT
60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
REVISION DRAWING
.003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm
WRITTEN CONSENT IS
PROHIBITED. ALL
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED A.Villarreal 2018-06-25 KIT, ID PLATE, MPD MANIFOLD
PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 0.6 lbs DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018-06-25
RIGHTS RESERVED. FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
CHECKED - -
125 .xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:2
APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-06-25
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN
MACHINED SURFACES
MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX. ANGULAR
.xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm
MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE B REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-06-25
SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23949 REV 01

B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23963
Description: LABEL KIT, MPD GEN2
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY23963 Rev No: 02
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA DT34875-001 LABEL, GATE VALVE A


02 1.00 EA DT34875-002 LABEL, GATE VALVE B
03 1.00 EA DT34875-003 LABEL, GATE VALVE C
04 1.00 EA DT34875-004 LABEL, GATE VALVE D
05 1.00 EA DT34875-005 LABEL, GATE VALVE E
06 1.00 EA DT34875-006 LABEL, TEMPERATURE IN
07 1.00 EA DT34875-007 LABEL, CHOKE A PRESSURE IN
08 1.00 EA DT34875-008 LABEL, CHOKE A PRESSURE OUT
09 1.00 EA DT34875-009 LABEL, CHOKE B PRESSURE IN
10 1.00 EA DT34875-010 LABEL, CHOKE B PRESSURE OUT
11 1.00 EA DT34875-011 LABEL, CHOKE MANIFOLD PRESSURE IN
12 0.00 EA DT34875-012 LABEL, CHOKE MANIFOLD PRESSURE OUT
12 1.00 EA DT34875-013 LABEL, CHOKE A DP FLOW IN
13 1.00 EA DT34875-014 LABEL, CHOKE A DP FLOW OUT
14 1.00 EA DT34875-015 LABEL, CHOKE B DP FLOW IN
15 1.00 EA DT34875-016 LABEL, CHOKE B DP FLOW OUT
16 1.00 EA DT34875-017 LABEL, MPD CHOKE A
17 1.00 EA DT34875-018 LABEL, MPD CHOKE B
18 1.00 EA DT34875-029 LABEL, CHOKE DP FLOW

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1

G G

16 3 02 13 8 10 02 15 4 17
02

F F

E E

D D

C C

B B

12 1 02 5 6 9 2 14
7 02 SHEET 1 OF 2
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION

INITIAL DESIGN
WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
MODELED A.Villarreal 2018/06/05
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018/06/28
DO NOT SCALE
CONFIDENTIAL AND FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] CHECKED - -
PROPRIETARY. THE
INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-2009
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS 0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm APPROVED S.Minnie 2018/06/28 DRAWING
PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
USE, REPRODUCTION RELEASE DATE -
OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS
RUN OUT .003
60 to 120"
120" to 280"
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION D
SHEET SIZE
A WITHOUT PRIOR STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES 280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm MODELED A.Anbarasan 2019-01-22 A
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
WRITTEN CONSENT PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] LABEL KIT, MPD GEN2
02 REPOSITION LABELS BASED ON RELOCATION OF TRANSMITTERS .010 or as Shown DRAWN A.Anbarasan 2019-01-22
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
RIGHTS RESERVED.
125 .xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm CHECKED S.Minnie 2019/01/22
01 INITIAL REVISION MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm APPROVED S.Minnie 2019-01-22 EST. WEIGHT SCALE
MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX. ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° AY23963 REV 02
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN REVISION RELEASE DATE 2019-01-22 0.3 lbs 1:12
11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1
11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1

G G

F F

E E

D D

C C

B B
18 11

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


SEE SHEET 1 FOR DEFAULT
TOLERANCES AND
SPECIFICATIONS

CONFIDENTIAL AND
PROPRIETARY. THE USE,
REPRODUCTION OR DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
A DISTRIBUTION WITHOUT A
PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT IS LABEL KIT, MPD GEN2
PROHIBITED. ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED.
SHEET 2 OF 2 AY23963 REV 02
SCALE 1:12 SHEET SIZE D
11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23967
Description: TRANSFORMER KIT, MPD GEN2
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: NO DRAWING Rev No: 0
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

00 2.00 EA E14255 GLAND, CABLE, 3/4 NPT, 0.33-0.63 IN


01 1.00 EA E19082 XFMR,30KVA,600/480VAC,3PH, 60 Hz,NEMA 4X
02 4.00 EA HH-0500NC-0100-SS CAPSCR, HEX HD, 1/2-13UNC x 1.00, SS
03 4.00 EA FW-0500-A-SS WASHER, F, 1/2, PLAIN, TYPE A, SS

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23968
Description: ORIFICE FLG ASSY,DP FLOW,6IN,ANSI 150,5K
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: AY23968 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA DT34876 FLANGE, ORIFICE, 6IN, ANSI 150, 5K


02 1.00 EA DT34877 ORIFICE, 5 HOLE
03 3.00 EA SS-10-24-0025-SS SETSREW, #10-24UNC x .25, CUP POINT,STAINLESS
STEEL
04 1.00 EA AY23210 ASSY,TRANSM, D PRESS, 6K EX IS 1/2" NPT

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

7 1 7

6 6
2

3
23 16 588
5 4 5
NOTE:
ITEM 4 SHIPPED LOOSE DETAIL A
SCALE 2 : 1

2 3 3X 1
4 4

3 3
2.76 70

10 254 APPROXIMATE
DIMENSION
( VERIFY AT INSTALLATION)

2 REF. CUSTOMER SUPPLIED 2

REF. CUSTOMER SUPPLIED


INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED S.MINNIE 2017/11/06
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018/06/06
CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1 PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994


INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
CHECKED -
APPROVED S.Minnie
-
2018/06/06
USE, REPRODUCTION
OR DISTRIBUTION
PER ASME Y14.8-1996

REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS


24" to 60"
60 to 120"
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED - - ORIFICE FLG ASSY,DP FLOW,6IN,ANSI 150,5K
PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 154.7 lbs DRAWN - -
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
0 PROTOTYPE RELEASE RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED - -
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:2 APPROVED - -
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23968 REV 01
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-06-07

A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23975
Description: KIT,SENSOR/INSTRUMENTATION, MPD OFF SKID
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: NO DRAWING Rev No: 0
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA AY23444 KIT,MPD READY SENSOR CABL,MP/RIG SUB RIO


02 1.00 EA AY23443 KIT, MPD READY INSTRUM, RIG SUB RIO
R01 0.00 EA ES10357 SCHEMATICS, MPD-READY KIT, OFF SKID
R02 0.00 EA EL10359 SCHEMATICS, MUD PUMP 1 RIO
R03 0.00 EA EL10360 SCHEMATICS, MUD PUMP 2 RIO
R04 0.00 EA EL10361 SCHEMATICS, MUD PUMP 3 RIO
R05 0.00 EA EL10364 SCHEMATICS, RIG SUB RIO
R06 0.00 EA DOC10236 CABLE LIST,MPD READY GEN2 OFF SKID SENSO

Printed: 3/27/2019
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY23976
Description: DP ASSY, 4IN FIG 1002 5K
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY23976 Rev No: 02
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA DT34893 SPOOL, DP, WELDMENT 4IN FIG 1002 5K


02 1.00 EA AY23222 ASSY,TRANSM, D PRESS, 10K EX IS 1/2" NPT
03 1.00 EA DT34894 PLATE LABEL AY23976
04 20.00 EA HH-0375NC-0075-SS CAPSCR, HEX HD, 3/8-16UNC x 0.75, SS
05 20.00 EA LW-0375-HS-SS LOCKWASHER, 3/8 HELICAL SPRING, SS
06 4.00 EA ST-0008-32-050 SCREW, SELF TAPPING, #8 x 0.50 LG, HEX
07 1.00 EA DT34838 CAGE, PROTECTION, DP 4IN
08 1.00 EA DT34875-027 LABEL, DP VERTICAL DENSITY OUT
REF 0.00 EA DOC10256 FAT & PRESSURE TEST- 5000 PSI
REF 0.00 EA F10352 PLUG, BULL, MALE, 4", FIG. 1002 1/2"NPT
REF 0.00 EA F10353 PLUG, BULL, FEM, 4", FIG. 1002 1/2"NPT

Printed: 3/27/2019
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

7 7

7 6
3

ROUTE PIGTAIL TOWARDS LO END OF CAPILLARY 02 2


6 6
1

LO END OF CAPILLARY

5 4 5 5

VIEW AT NAME PLATE


5 4

5 4 7
1

5 4

4 4
2

5 4 8 02

5 4

5 4
3
5 4 3

HI END OF CAPILLARY
5 4

5 4
2 2
5 4

PROTOTYPE
DATE: 2018/11/06 BY:SM

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED A.Villarreal 2018-05-24
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018-05-24
CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] - CHECKED - -
PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-05-27
USE, REPRODUCTION PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS 60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED A.Anbaras 2018-11-06 DP ASSY, 4IN FIG 1002 5K
02 ADD LABEL PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 503.0 lbs DRAWN an
A.Anbarasan 2018-11-06
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
01 INITIAL DESIGN RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED - -
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:8 APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-11-06
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY23976 REV 02
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-11-08
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY24050
Description: ASSY, TRANSM, PRESS, 5K EX IS 1/2" MNPT
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY24050 Rev No: 02
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA N11505 XMTR, PRESS, 5K PSI, 1/2 MNPT, IS (ASSY)


02 1.00 EA E17418 GLAND, CABLE, M20,7.0-12.0mm,.28-.47 HAZ
03 0.00 EA E16999 PLUG, M20, Exd, Exe, BRASS
04 1.00 EA H15-070104-08-08 ADAPTER, FEMALE 1/2 JIC, FEMALE 1/2 NPT
05 1.00 EA H15-070102-08-08 ADAPTER, MALE 1/2 JIC, MALE 1/2 NPT
REF 0.10 EA TK1-51 SEAL, PIPE, C/W TEFLON, 50ML

Printed: 3/27/2019
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

7 7
2
1

1a

6 6

5 5

4 4

ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS:
3 3
1. ASSEMBLY OF TRANSMITTER IS DONE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH
INSTALLATION ON NEXT HIGHER LEVEL ASSEMBLY.
2. INSTALL FEMALE FITTING (ITEM 4) ON THE TRANSMITTER USING
SEALANT (ITEM 6). 4
3. INSTALL MALE FITTING (ITEM 5) INTO NHA USING SEALANT (ITEM 6).
4. ORIENT THE TRANSMITTER PER THE NHA. 4a
5. INSTALL THE FEMALE FITTING (ITEM 4) ONTO THE MALE FITTING
(ITEM 5) AND TIGHTEN THE NUT UNTIL WRENCH RESISTANCE IS 5a
FELT.
6. MAKE A MARK ON THE NUT (ITEM 4a) WITH A MARKING PEN AT THE 5
2
2 6 O'CLOCK POSITION.
7. USING SUITABLE WRENCHES, HOLD THE MALE FITTING (ITEM 5a)
AND TIGHTEN THE NUT OF THE FEMALE FITTING (ITEM 4a) FOR 2
FLATS (1/3 OF A TURN). 02
8. VERIFY THAT THE MARK ON THE NUT IS IN THE 10 O'CLOCK
POSITION AFTER TIGHTENING.
9. ORIENT THE SENSOR HEAD (ITEM 1a) ACCORDING TO THE NHA.
10. INSTALL THE GLAND (ITEM 2) AND PLUG (ITEM 5) IN THE
ORIENTATION PER THE NHA. WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
11. VERIFY INSTALLATION BY PRESSURE TEST OF THE NHA TO TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL
MODELED A.Villarreal
DRAWN A.Villarreal
2018-08-06
2018-08-08
CONFIDENTIAL AND
WORKING PRESSURE.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1 PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994


INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
CHECKED
APPROVED S.Minnie 2018-08-08
USE, REPRODUCTION
OR DISTRIBUTION
PER ASME Y14.8-1996

REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS


24" to 60"
60 to 120"
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED - - ASSY, TRANSMITTER, PRESSURE
02 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS FOR JIC FITTINGS PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 0.8 lbs DRAWN - -
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
01 PROTOTYPE RELEASE RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED - -
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:1 APPROVED S.Minnie -
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY24050 REV 02
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE -

A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY24051
Description: ASSY TRANS PRES 5K EX IS 1/2" MNPT PIGT
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY24051 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA N11505 XMTR, PRESS, 5K PSI, 1/2 MNPT, IS (ASSY)


02 1.00 EA E17418 GLAND, CABLE, M20,7.0-12.0mm,.28-.47 HAZ
03 0.00 EA E16999 PLUG, M20, Exd, Exe, BRASS
04 1.00 EA AY23683-002 CABLE, PIGTAIL, PLUG 6 PIN, 3TP SHD 2FT
REF 0.00 EA EL10364 SCHEMATICS, RIG SUB RIO

Printed: 3/27/2019
A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

7 7
4

2
1
6 6
1a

5 5
3

4 4

3 3

ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS:

2 -ASSEMBLY OF TRANSMITTER IS DONE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH INSTALLATION ON 2


NEXT HIGHER LEVEL ASSEMBLY.
-ORIENT THE SENSOR HEAD (ITEM 1a) ACCORDING TO THE NHA BY LOOSENING
THE SETSCREW.
-INSTALL THE GLAND (ITEM 2) AND PLUG (ITEM 3) IN THE ORIENTATION PER THE
NHA.
-VERIFY INSTALLATION BY PRESSURE TEST OF THE NHA TO WORKING PRESSURE.

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED A.Villarreal 2018-08-06
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN A.Villarreal 2018-08-24
CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1 PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994


INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
CHECKED -
APPROVED S.Minnie
-
2018-08-24
USE, REPRODUCTION
OR DISTRIBUTION
PER ASME Y14.8-1996

REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS


24" to 60"
60 to 120"
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED - - ASSY, TRANSMITTER, PRESSURE
PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 0.7 lbs DRAWN - -
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
01 INITIAL RELEASE RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED - -
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:1 APPROVED S.Minnie -
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY24051 REV 01
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE -

A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY24186
Description: ASSY, FLANGE, DP FLOW
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY24186 Rev No: 02
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA DT32877 FLANGE, DP ORIFICE, 4-1/16, RTJ, 5K


02 1.00 EA DT34763 ORIFICE, ECCENTRIC, 76MM
03 3.00 EA SH-M5-08MM-LP CAPSCR, HEX SOC HD, M5 x 08MM, LOW PROF
04 1.00 EA C10007 ANTI-SEIZE, COPPER BASED LUBRICANT

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1

G G

NOTE ORIENTATION
OF ECCENTRIC ORIFICE
3X
F F
2 3 02

E E

D D

C C
1

NOTE:
B 02 1. APPLY ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND (ITEM 4) AROUND CIRCUMFERENCE OF ORIFICE (ITEM 2) AND THREADS OF CAP SCREW (ITEM 3) B

SHEET 1 OF 1
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION

INITIAL DESIGN
WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
PROTOTYPE MODELED A.Anbarasan 2019/01/11
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DRAWN 2019/01/11
A.Anbarasan
DATE:2019/02/27 BY: SM
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DO NOT SCALE
CONFIDENTIAL AND FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC] CHECKED - -
PROPRIETARY. THE
INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994
INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS 0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm APPROVED S.Minnie 2019/01/11 DRAWING
PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
USE, REPRODUCTION RELEASE DATE -
OR DISTRIBUTION REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS
RUN OUT .003
60 to 120"
120" to 280"
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION D
SHEET SIZE
A WITHOUT PRIOR STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES 280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm MODELED A.Anbarasan 2019-02-27
A
WRITTEN CONSENT PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
.010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] ASSY, FLANGE, DP FLOW
02 REPLACE SET SCREWS WITH CAP SREWS; ADDED NOTE PARALLELISM DRAWN A.Anbarasan 2019-02-27
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
125 .xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm CHECKED
01 INITIAL REVISION RIGHTS RESERVED. MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm APPROVED S.Minnie 2019-02-28 EST. WEIGHT SCALE
MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX. ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° AY24186 REV 02
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN REVISION RELEASE DATE 2019-02-28 61.4 lbs 1:1
11 10 9 8 IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! 5 4 3 2 1
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY24273
Description: ASSY TRANS PRES 10K EX IS 1/2" MNPT PIGT
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: AY24273 Rev No: 01
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA N11375 TRANSM, PRESS, 10K EX IS 1/2" MNPT


02 1.00 EA E17418 GLAND, CABLE, M20,7.0-12.0mm,.28-.47 HAZ
03 0.00 EA E16999 PLUG, M20, Exd, Exe, BRASS
04 1.00 EA AY23683-002 CABLE, PIGTAIL, PLUG 6 PIN, 3TP SHD 2FT

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K

4
7 7

1a
6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

PROTOTYPE
DATE: 2018-08-24 BY: S.M.

ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS:
2 -ASSEMBLY OF TRANSMITTER IS DONE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH INSTALLATION ON 2
NEXT HIGHER LEVEL ASSEMBLY.
-ORIENT THE SENSOR HEAD (ITEM 1a) ACCORDING TO THE NHA BY LOOSENING
THE SETSCREW.
-INSTALL THE GLAND (ITEM 2) AND PLUG (ITEM 3) IN THE ORIENTATION PER THE
NHA.
-VERIFY INSTALLATION BY PRESSURE TEST OF THE NHA TO WORKING PRESSURE.

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED A.VILLARREA 2017-08-25
TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL DRAWN L
A.Villarreal 2018-08-24
CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1 PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994


INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS
FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
CHECKED -
APPROVED S.Minnie
-
2018-08-24
USE, REPRODUCTION
OR DISTRIBUTION
PER ASME Y14.8-1996

REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS


24" to 60"
60 to 120"
± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm
± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
RELEASE DATE -
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 1
WITHOUT PRIOR RUN OUT .003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm REVISION
WRITTEN CONSENT
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
280" & OVER ± 1/2" 7112 & OVER ± 13 mm EST. WEIGHT MODELED - - ASSY TRANS PRES 10K EX IS 1/2" MNPT PIGT
PARALLELISM .010 IN 5 INCHES MACHINING [IMPERIAL] MACHINING [METRIC] 0.7 lbs DRAWN - -
IS PROHIBITED. ALL FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm
01 INITIAL REVISION RIGHTS RESERVED. 125 CHECKED - -
.xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:1 APPROVED S.Minnie -
MACHINED SURFACES .xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm SHEET 1 OF 1 AY24273 REV 01
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX.
ANGULAR MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE D REVISION RELEASE DATE -

A B C D IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! G H I J K
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY24279
Description: ASSY, 12 in, PENDANT ARM
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: AY24279 Rev No: A
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA DT16366 SPACER, HORIZONTAL WALL BRACKET,1/2 in


02 1.00 EA M11015 WALL JOINT, HORIZONTAL, SERIES 2
03 1.00 EA M10484 TUBE, PENDANT ARM SYSTEM SERIES 2
03A 0.00 EA DT18187 TUBE, 4.375 IN, PENDANT ARM ASSEMBLY
04 1.00 EA M11014 SWIVEL-TILT, STRAIGHT, SERIES 2
R01 4.00 EA FW-6MM-SS WASHER, F, 6MM, TYPE A, SS
R02 4.00 EA SH-M6-12MM-GR12.9 CAPSCR, HEX SOC HD, M6 x 12MM, GR12.9
R03 4.00 EA HH-0250NC-0150-SS CAPSCR, HEX HD, 1/4-20UNC X 1.50, SS
R04 4.00 EA HN-0250NC-GR8 HEX NUT, 1/4-20UNC, GR8
R05 4.00 EA LW-0250-HS LOCKWASHER, 1/4 HELICAL SPRING

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


A B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E

4
4

4
3
3

2
2

INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED C.Stephenson 2018-08-25

CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED


INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
MATERIAL DRAWN
CHECKED
C.Stephenson
D.Pham
2018/08/27
2018-09-24
1
PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS 0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
USE, REPRODUCTION APPROVED R.Nowak 2018-09-26
PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm RELEASE DATE 2018-10-01 DO NOT SCALE
OR DISTRIBUTION
WITHOUT PRIOR
REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS
RUN OUT
60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
REVISION DRAWING
.003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm
WRITTEN CONSENT IS
PROHIBITED. ALL
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
PARALLELISM
280" & OVER ± 1/2"
MACHINING [IMPERIAL]
7112 & OVER ± 13 mm
MACHINING [METRIC]
EST. WEIGHT
23.9 lbs
MODELED
DRAWN
C.Stephenson
C.Stephenson
2018-09-06
2018-09-06
ASSY, 12.00 IN, PENDANT ARM
.010 IN 5 INCHES
A INITIAL REVISION 3226 RIGHTS RESERVED. FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm CHECKED D.Pham 2018-09-24
125 .xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:4 APPROVED R.Nowak 2018-09-26
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN
MACHINED SURFACES
MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX. ANGULAR
.xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm
MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE B REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-10-01
SHEET 1 OF 1 AY24279 REV A

B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY24280
Description: KIT, HMI, PENDANT ARM,12 in,FLAT VERT
Eng ID: 2
Drawing ID: AY24280 Rev No: A
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA N11268-IMG-MPD PANEL PC,17 IN,CORE i3, 16GB RAM,MPD IMG


02 1.00 EA DT30031 ENCLOSURE, DISPLAY, 17 INCH, PHOENIX
03 1.00 EA DT23456 PANEL, BACK DISPLAY HMI ENCLOSURE, 2 HOL
04 1.00 EA AY24279 ASSY, 12 in, PENDANT ARM
05 0.00 EA DT16366 SPACER, HORIZONTAL WALL BRACKET,1/2 in
06 0.00 EA HN-0250NC-GR8 HEX NUT, 1/4-20UNC, GR8
07 0.00 EA HH-0250NC-0150-SS CAPSCR, HEX HD, 1/4-20UNC X 1.50, SS
08 0.00 EA LW-0250-HS LOCKWASHER, 1/4 HELICAL SPRING
09 4.00 EA FW-8-A WASHER, F, #8, PLAIN, TYPE A
10 8.00 EA PH-8-32-0050-SS PAN HD, MACH SCREW SS, #8-32UNC x 0.50
11 1.00 EA E04-2038-010 SEALING RING, 3/4 NPT
12 1.00 EA E11323 LOCKNUT, 3/4 NPT STEEL, W/GASKETED SEAL
13 1.00 EA E11336 GLAND, 3/4 NPT, STEEL, .250-.375
14 4.00 EA SH-M6-12MM-GR12.9 CAPSCR, HEX SOC HD, M6 x 12MM, GR12.9
15 4.00 EA FW-6MM-SS WASHER, F, 6MM, TYPE A, SS
16 1.00 EA N10308 PLUG, RJ45, FIELD ATTACHABLE
R01 1.00 EA N10397-IMG TPCS, COMPUTER, ALL IN ONE, RW CLIENT
R02 40.00 FT E03-1016-010 CABLE, 3C 16 AWG, TYPE P
R03 40.00 FT E14537 CABLE, CAT5, STRANDED, SHIELDED, 2 PAIR
R04 2.00 EA E14539 CONNECTOR, RJ45, IP20

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


A B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E

4 1
4

3
3

13 2
2

16 12 11

DETAIL A DETAIL B
SCALE 1 : 2 SCALE 1 : 2
INITIAL DESIGN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
WELDING PROCEDURE AS PER CANRIG SPECIFICATION - ENG 704, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MODELED C.Stephenson 2018/08/25

CONFIDENTIAL AND UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE - UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED


INTERPRET DRAWING PER ASME Y14.5-1994 FABRICATING [IMPERIAL] FABRICATING [METRIC]
MATERIAL DRAWN
CHECKED
C.Stephenosn
D.Pham
2018/08/25
2018-09-24
1
PROPRIETARY. THE INTERPRET CASTINGS AND FORGINGS 0 to 24" ± 1/16" 0 TO 610 mm ± 1 mm
USE, REPRODUCTION APPROVED R.Nowak 2018-09-26
PER ASME Y14.8-1996 24" to 60" ± 1/8" 610 TO 1525 ± 3 mm RELEASE DATE 2018-10-01 DO NOT SCALE
OR DISTRIBUTION
WITHOUT PRIOR
REMOVE SHARP CORNERS AND BURRS
RUN OUT
60 to 120" ± 3/16" 1525 TO 3048 ± 5 mm
REVISION DRAWING
.003 120" to 280" ± 1/4" 3048 TO 7112 ± 7 mm
WRITTEN CONSENT IS
PROHIBITED. ALL
STRAIGHTNESS .005 IN 5 INCHES
PERPENDICULARITY .010 IN 5 INCHES
PARALLELISM
280" & OVER ± 1/2"
MACHINING [IMPERIAL]
7112 & OVER ± 13 mm
MACHINING [METRIC]
EST. WEIGHT
369.9 lbs
MODELED
DRAWN
C.Stephenson
C.Stephenson
2018-09-06
2018-09-06
HMI, PENDANT ARM,12 in, FLAT
.010 IN 5 INCHES
A INITIAL REVISION 3226 RIGHTS RESERVED. FLATNESS .010 or as Shown DECIMAL .x ± .030" DECIMAL x. ± .8 mm CHECKED D.Pham 2018-09-24 VERT MOUNT
125 .xx ± .015" x.x ± .40 mm SCALE 1:10 APPROVED R.Nowak 2018-09-26
REV REVISION DESCRIPTION ECN
MACHINED SURFACES
MIN. RADIUS UNLESS SHOWN = 0.03 MAX. ANGULAR
.xxx ± .005" x.xx ± .13 mm
MACHINING ± 1° FABRICATION ± 2° SHEET SIZE B REVISION RELEASE DATE 2018-10-01
SHEET 1 OF 3 AY24280 REV A

B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E
A B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E
E

4 4

C C E
EXAMPLE FRONT CONSOLE EXAMPLE TABLE
D

3 3

D
J J

.75 19.1 .13 3.3

FIELD TO PUNCH
2 HOLE 2

4X .31 7.9 .13 3.3


FIELD TO DRILL DETAIL M
HOLE 1 SCALE 1 : 3
2 2 63.2
GLAND REMOVED
FOR CLARITY
.75 19.1 .13 3.3
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION

FIELD TO DRILL SEE SHEET 1 FOR DEFAULT


TOLERANCES AND SPECIFICATIONS

1 HOLE DETAIL K CONFIDENTIAL AND


1
PROPRIETARY. THE USE,
SCALE 1 : 4 REPRODUCTION OR DO NOT SCALE

ASSEMBLY REMOVED SECTION J-J


DISTRIBUTION WITHOUT DRAWING
PRIOR WRITTEN CONCENT
HMI, PENDANT ARM,12 in, FLAT
FOR CLARITY SCALE 1 : 8 IS PROHIBITED. ALL
RIGHTS RESERVED. VERT MOUNT
SCALE 1:12 SHEET SIZE B SHEET 2 OF 3 AY24280 REV A

A B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E
A B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E

SECTION C-C
4 3
4

SECTION D-D
SCALE 1 : 8

3 SECTION E-E 3
SCALE 1 : 8
ROUTED CABLES 5 8X

8 4X
4X 6 7

4X
2 DETAIL F 2
10
SCALE 1 : 2
8X

DETAIL G
SCALE 1 : 2

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION


SEE SHEET 1 FOR DEFAULT
TOLERANCES AND SPECIFICATIONS

1 CONFIDENTIAL AND
PROPRIETARY. THE USE, 1
14 15 REPRODUCTION OR DO NOT SCALE
DISTRIBUTION WITHOUT DRAWING
PRIOR WRITTEN CONCENT
4X 4X DETAIL H IS PROHIBITED. ALL HMI, PENDANT ARM,12 in, FLAT
RIGHTS RESERVED. VERT MOUNT
SCALE 1 : 2 SHEET 3 OF 3 AY24280 REV A
SCALE 1:12 SHEET SIZE B
A B IF IN DOUBT......PLEASE ASK! D E
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY24287
Description: KIT, DRILL, PUNCH, MPD
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: NO DWG Rev No: 0
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

00 1.00 EA M10084 DRILL BIT, 1/8 DIA, 135 DEG, 6IN, COBALT
00 1.00 EA M10230 DRILL BIT, 7/16
00 1.00 EA M10348 DRILL BIT, 5/16
00 1.00 EA M10868 DRILL BIT, 3/8
00 1.00 EA M16804 STUD DRIVER, HOLE PUNCH, 3/4 in

Printed: 1/23/2020 Database: CANR


Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY28908
Description: JBOX,TERMINAL, MPD INSTRUMENTS, RIG SUB
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: AY28908 Rev No: A
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA DT24371 JBOX,ENCL DETAIL,300x400x150,MPD,RIG SUB


02 7.00 EA E19117 CABLE GLAND, Ex, 0.26-0.55, 3/4 NPT
03 1.00 EA P08-1002-010 BREATHER/DRAIN, 3/8 NPT, MALE
04 16.00 EA E15428 TERMINAL,3LVL,3CKT,PT,26-12AWG,5.2MM,GRY
05 2.00 EA E15414 END COVER, 3 LEVEL, D-PT 2,5-3L, GRAY
06 3.00 EA E10955 END BRACKET, TS 35 RAIL, 9.5MM
07 50.00 EA E10962 MARKING TAGS, TERMINAL, BLANK, 5.2MM
08 2.00 EA E16718 JUMPER, RED, 5.2MM, 20 POLE
09 15.00 IN E12740 RAIL, TS 35, STEEL, SLOTTED, 15 MM

Printed: 3/27/2019
NO DRAWING FOUND IN EPDM
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: AY28909
Description: JBOX, TERMINAL, W/PIGTAILS
Eng ID: 1
Drawing ID: AY28908 Rev No: A
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA AY28908 JBOX,TERMINAL, MPD INSTRUMENTS, RIG SUB


02 7.00 EA 202-00183-00AA CABLE, PIGTAIL, RW8 J-BOX SIGNAL CABLE
03 1.00 EA AY13859-15M ASSY CABLE,10 TP/SHIELD, PLUG,PIN,15 FT
R01 0.00 EA ES10357 SCHEMATICS, MPD-READY KIT, OFF SKID

Printed: 3/27/2019
NO DRAWING FOUND IN EPDM
Engineering
Bill of Material
Part: DT24371
Description: JBOX,ENCL DETAIL,300x400x150,MPD,RIG SUB
Eng ID: 0
Drawing ID: DT24371 Rev No: A
Item Qty Units Part ID Description

01 1.00 EA E19116 ENCLOSURE IECEx ZONE 1, 300x400x150 SS

Printed: 3/27/2019
NO DRAWING FOUND IN EPDM
SUBSECTION 6E: SCHEMATICS

Schematic Description Schematic Rev

ES10150 MPD SKID, COVER/INDEX ES10150 D


ES10150 MPD SKID, ONE-LINE ES10150 D
ES10150 MPD POWER JBOX POWER DISTRIBUTION ES10150 D
ES10150-04 MPD POWER JBOX SERVO DRIVES A&B ES10150-04 D
ES10150-05 MPD PLC JBOX, POWER DISTRIBUTION ES10150-05 D
ES10150-06 MPD PLC JBOX, PLC & ETHERNET ES10150-06 D
ES10150-07 MPD PLC JBOX, VALVE CONNECTIONS ES10150-07 D
ES10150-08 MPD PLC JBOX, SENSOR CONNECTIONS ES10150-08 D
ES10150-09 MPD PLC JBOX, SENSOR CONNECTIONS ES10150-09 D
ES10150-10 MPD PLC JBOX, SLOT 6 SPARE IO POINTS ES10150-10 D

1/6/2020 Serial Number: MPD-005


Subsection 6E: Schematics

1/6/2020 Serial Number: MPD-005


PROJECT DESCRIPTION: SCHEMATICS, MPD SKID, GEN 2, 600V

Table of Contents
Page No Description
01 MPD SKID, COVER/INDEX
02 MPD SKID, ONE-LINE
03 MPD POWER JBOX, POWER DISTRIBUTION
04 MPD POWER JBOX, SERVO DRIVES A&B
05 MPD PLC JBOX, POWER DISTRIBUTION
06 MPD PLC JBOX, PLC & ETHERNET
07 MPD PLC JBOX, VALVE CONNECTIONS
08 MPD PLC JBOX, SENSOR CONNECTIONS
09 MPD PLC JBOX, SENSOR CONNECTIONS
10 MPD PLC JBOX SLOT 6 SPARE IO POINTS

DRAWN RAR 18/06/26 SHEET


THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY
APPLICATION NOTES PD CHECKED TTN 18/06/28 SIZE
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D RCT 18/06/28

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD SKID,
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN INDEX COVER/INDEX
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 01 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
02.00 CUSTOMER CONTROL UNIT PLC JBOX

02.01
08.01
CHK-PIT-001
CAB021/GP IN CHOKE MANIFOLD
02.02 GND12 10 AWG
PRESS IN
1TSP

02.03
08.06
CHK-PIT-002
CAB022/GP OUT CHOKE MANIFOLD
02.04 GND13 10 AWG
PRESS OUT
1TSP

02.05
08.10
CHK-A-PIT-001
CAB023/PA IN
02.06 CHOKE A GND14 10 AWG
1TSP PRESSURE IN

02.07
08.15
CHK-A-PIT-002
TERMINAL JBOX CAB024/PA OUT
02.08 CHOKE A GND15 10 AWG
1TSP PRESSURE OUT

02.09
08.19
CHK-A-FIT-001
CAB010 4C#16 CAB025/FA IN CHOKE A
02.10 GND16 10 AWG
FLOW IN
POWER 1TSP

02.11
08.24
CHK-A-FIT-002
CAB011 ETHERNET CAB026/FA OUT
02.12 XFORMER
CHOKE A GND17 10 AWG
1TSP FLOW OUT

02.13
08.28
CHK-B-PIT-001
CUSTOMER 600V XFRMR
600 / 480VAC XFORMER CAB012 ETHERNET CAB027/PB IN
02.14 4C#10 4C#10 4C#10 CHOKE B GND18 10 AWG
1TSP PRESSURE IN

02.15
08.33
CHK-B-PIT-002
CAB013 CAB028/PB OUT
02.16 10C#16 CHOKE B GND19 10 AWG
1TSP PRESSURE OUT

02.17 POWER JBOX


08.39
CHK-B-FIT-001
CAB029/FB IN CHOKE B
02.18 GND20 10 AWG
FLOW IN
1TSP

02.19
08.44
MPD-GV-A CHK-B-FIT-002
CAB033 CAB030/FB OUT
02.20 CAB001/GV-A 03.05 CHOKE B GND21 10 AWG
1TSP FLOW OUT
4C#14
02.21 GATE VALVE A CAB014/GV-A
08.48
CHK-TT-001
10C#16
SD A LEG A IN (UPSTREAM) CAB031/T IN TEMPERATURE
02.22 GND22 10 AWG
IN
GND5 10 AWG 1TSP

02.23
08.53
MPD-GV-C CHK-TT-002
CAB034 CAB032/T OUT
02.24 CAB002/GV-C 03.09
TEMPERATURE
GND23 10 AWG
1TSP OUT
4C#14
02.25 GATE VALVE C CAB015/GV-C
08.57
CHK-FIT-001
10C#16
SD B LEG A OUT (DOWNSTREAM) CAB033
02.26 MANIFOLD FLOW IN
GND24 10 AWG

GND6 10 AWG 1TSP

02.27
MPD-GV-B

02.28 CAB003/GV-B 03.13

4C#14
02.29 GATE VALVE B CAB016/GV-B D

10C#16 =RIG SUB SKID


LEG B IN (UPSTREAM) =RIG+OFF SKID
02.30
GND7 10 AWG
D
02.31
MPD-GV-D SP-PIT-002A 0900

CAB513 CAB513A CAB513B STAND PIPE PRESSURE 2


02.32 CAB004/GV-D 03.17
AY13860-25E XMITTER
4C#14 202-00183-00AA 202-00183-00AA
02.33 GATE VALVE D CAB017/GV-D
SP-PIT-003A 0905
10C#16
LEG B OUT (DOWNSTREAM) CAB514 CAB514A CAB514B STAND PIPE PRESSURE 3
02.34
GND8 10 AWG AY13860-25E XMITTER D
202-00183-00AA 202-00183-00AA
02.35
MPD-GV-E SP-DIT-001 0910

NAL JBOX
CAB515 CAB515A CAB515B STAND PIPE DP
02.36 CAB005/GV-E 03.21
DENSITY IN
AY13860-25E
4C#14 202-00183-00AA 202-00183-00AA
02.37 GATE VALVE E CAB018/GV-E

TERM I
RCD-PIT-001 0915
10C#16
CAB516 CAB516A CAB516B BOP RCD RETURN
02.38
PRESSURE
GND9 10 AWG AY13860-25E
202-00183-00AA 202-00183-00AA

D
02.39

OFF- SKI
CHK-DIT-001 0920

BUS
MPD-CHK-A CAB531B CAB531A CAB531 CAB517 CAB517A CAB517B RCD DP DENSITY
02.40
OUT PRESSURE

GND
CHOKE A AY13860-25E
AY13859-5F AY13859-75E AY13859-15M 202-00183-00AA 202-00183-00AA
02.41 4C#14/2TSP#16 CHOKE ACTUATOR A GND10 10 AWG

VE EARTH
SERVO A WH-PIT-001 0924

ENCODER 5TP CAB518 CAB518A CAB518B WELLHEAD


02.42 (OPTIONAL)

BUS
PRESSURE
AY13860-25E

PROTECTI
202-00183-00AA 202-00183-00AA D
MPD-CHK-B

E GND
02.43
CHOKE B SP-PIT-001 0929

I
4C#14/2TSP#16 CAB519 CAB519A CAB519B STAND PIPE
0244 CHOKE ACTUATOR B GND11 10 AWG
D
SERVO B PRESSURE 01
AY13860-25E
202-00183-00AA 202-00183-00AA
ENCODER 5TP
02.45

GND3 10 AW G
GND25 10AW G
02.46

GND4 10 AW G
GND1 10 AW G

GND2 10 AW G

02.47

02.48

NOTES:
02.49 1. ALL GROUND WIRES SHOULD BE GREEN OR GREEN / YELLOW.

SKID GND SKID GND


2. 1 METER DISTANCE BETWEEN PE AND IE GROUND
02.50 NOTE 2

02.51
DRAWN RAR 18/06/26 SHEET
THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL APPLICATION NOTES PD SIZE
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY CHECKED TTN 18/06/28
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D RCT 18/06/28

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD SKID,
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN ONE LINE ONE-LINE
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD.CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 02 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
=MPD SKID+TERMINATION JBOX =MPD SKID+POWER JBOX =MPD SKID+TERMINATION JBOX

03.00 D
CUSTOMER POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
600/480 XFMR D D
(480 X) D
600VAC
R_01 P_01 600V TB1
XFRMR 6 AWG L1
03.01 BLK BLK L1
1
TB1:1/DB:L1
1 1

6 AWG L2
WHT WHT L2 TB1:2/DB:L2
03.02 2
2
2
6 AWG L3
RED RED L3 TB1:3/DB:L3
3
03.03 3 3

GRN GRN GND 4

4 4
03.04

CB1 MPD-GV-A
TB2
CAB001/GV-A 02.20
03.05 CB1:1/DB:1 CB1:2/TB2:1
1
BLK TB1
1 2 03.06

CB1:3/DB:3 CB1:4/TB2:2 WHT


TB2
03.06 SEE NOTE 1 FOR 480V FROM CUSTOMER POWER
3 4
2

CB1:5/DB:5 CB1:6/TB2:3 RED


TB3
6.3 3
03.07 5
AMP 6

4 GRN
GND

03.08

CB2 MPD-GV-C
CAB002/GV-C 02.24
03.09 CB2:1/DB:1 CB2:2/TB2:5
5
BLK TB1
1 2

CB2:3/DB:3 CB2:4/TB2:6 WHT TB2


03.10 3 4
6

CB2:5/DB:5 CB2:6/TB2:7 RED


TB3
6.3 7
03.11 5
AMP 6

8 GRN
GND

03.12

CB3 MPD-GV-B
CAB003/GV-B 02.28
03.13 CB3:1/DB:1 CB3:2/TB2:9
9
BLK
TB1
1 2

CB3:3/DB:3 CB3:4/TB2:10 WHT


TB2
03.14 3 4
10

CB3:5/DB:5 CB3:6/TB2:11 RED


TB3
6.3 11
03.15 5 AMP 6

12 GRN GND

03.16

CB4 MPD-GV-D
CAB004/GV-D 02.32
03.17 CB4:1/DB:L1 CB4:2/TB2:13
13
BLK
TB1
1 2

CB4:3/DB:L2 CB4:4/TB2:14 WHT


TB2
03.18 3 4
14

CB4:5/DB:L3 CB4:6/TB2:15 RED


TB3
6.3 15
03.19 5
AMP 6

16 GRN GND

03.20

CB5 MPD-GV-E
CAB005/GV-E 02.36
03.21 CB5:1/DB:1 CB5:2/TB2:17
17
BLK
TB1
L1 T1

CB5:3/DB:3 CB5:4/TB2:18 WHT


TB2
03.22 L2 T2
18

CB5:5/DB:5 CB5:6/TB2:19 RED


TB3
6.3 19
03.23 L3
AMP T3

20 GRN GND
03.20
03.24
LINE REACTOR 1
CB6
03.25 CB6:1/DB:1 CB6:2/LR1:L1 L1 L1 LR1:L1/SD A:L1
L1 (REACTOR 1-SERVO A)/04.00
1 2

CB6:3/DB:3 CB6:4/LR1:L2 L2 L2 LR1:L2/SD A:L2


03.26 3 4
L2 (REACTOR 1-SERVO A)/04.01

CB6:5/DB:5 CB6:6/LR1:L3 L3 L3 LR1:L3/SD A:L3


12 L3 (REACTOR 1-SERVO A)/04.02
03.27 5 AMP 6

GND GND
GND (REACTOR 1-SERVO A)/04.03

03.28
LINE REACTOR 2
CB7
03.29 CB8:1/DB:1 CB7:2/LR2:L1 L1 L1 LR2:L1/SD A:L1
L1 (REACTOR 2-SERVO B)/04.20
1 2

CB8:3/DB:3 CB7:4/LR2:L2 L2 L2 LR2:L2/SD A:L2


03.30 3 4
L2 (REACTOR 2-SERVO B)/04.21

CB8:5/DB:5 CB7:6/LR2:L3 L3 L3 LR2:L3/SD A:L3


12 L3 (REACTOR 2-SERVO B)/04.22
03.31 5
AMP 6

D
GND GND
GND (REACTOR 2-SERVO B)/04.23

03.32 NOTES:
1. FOR 480V FROM COSTOMER
CB8
03.33 CUSTOMER PWR 480V =MPD SKID+TERMINATION JBOX CB8:1/DB:1 CB8:2/TB4:1
L1 (CB8 - TB4:1)/05.02
1 2
480VAC R_01A P_01A 480V TB1
BLK CB8:3/DB:3 CB8:4/TB4:2
03.34 1
1
3 4
L2 (CB8 - TB4:2)/05.03
1
WHT CB8:5/DB:5 CB8:6/TB4:3
2 4.5 L3 (CB8 - TB4:3)/05.04
03.35 2 2 5
AMP 6

RED
3 GND (CB8 - TB4:4)/05.05
3 3
03.36
GRN 4

4 4

03.37

DRAWN RAR 18/06/26 SHEET


THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY
APPLICATION NOTES PD CHECKED TTN 18/06/28 SIZE
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D RCT 18/06/28

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD POWER JBOX,
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN POWER JBOX POWER DISTRIBUTION
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 03 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
=MPD SKID+TERMINATION JBOX
=MPD SKID+POWER JBOX =MPD SKID+SERVO CHOKE 1
D MPD-CHK-A
SERVO DRIVE A TB3
CAB033 CHOKE A BLK
04.00 L1 (REACTOR 1-SERVO A)/03.25 L1 U
L1 TB3-1/SD A-U
1
L1
9

L2 TB3-2/SD A-V L2 WHT


04.01 L2 (REACTOR 1-SERVO A)/03.26 L2 V
2 7

L3 W L3 TB3-3/SD A-W L3 RED


04.02 L3 (REACTOR 1-SERVO A)/03.27 3 8

GND GND
GND GND GND
GND (REACTOR 1-SERVO A)/03.28 4 19
04.03

MBRK +
4 4 WHT
5 20
04.04
24VDC + 5 5 WHT
24VDC SEE PAGE 05 MBRK -
6 21
0VDC -
04.05
GROUND TO DRAIN
7 22
DRIVE MTR SHD
04.06 TB5
SIN + SD A WHT SERVO A WHT SIN + WHT SIN +
1 SD A:1/TB5:1
1 3

04.07 SIN -
2
BRN SD A:2/TB5:2 BRN SIN - BRN SIN -
ETHERNET SEE PAGE 06 2 4

04.08 COS + GRN GRN COS + PINK COS +


3 SD A:3/TB5:3
3 1

04.09 COS - YEL YEL COS - BLK COS -


4 SD A:4/TB5:4
4 2

DATA+ DATA+ GRY DATA+


04.10 5 GRY SD A:5/TB5:5
5
GRY
5
SB+ 1

DATA- PINK PINK DATA- GRN DATA-


SD A:10/TB5:6
04.11 SB- 2 10
6 6

S1 3 TS BLU BLU TS YEL TS+


11 SD A:11/TB5:7
04.12 7 11
SC 4
+5VDC RED RED +5VDC
14 SD A:14/TB5:8
N/C 8
04.13 S2 5

+9VDC BLK BLK +9VDC RED +9VDC


SAFE 7 SD A:7/TB5:9
9 12
04.14 TORQUE-OFF
WIRING
ECOM VIOLET VIOLET ECOM BLU ECOM
6 SD A:6/TB5:10
10 13
04.15
JUMPER

GROUND TO 11 10 YEL
10
04.16 PLUG ENCODER SHD
DRAIN
18
04.17

04.18

=MPD SKID+SERVO CHOKE 2


04.19
SERVO DRIVE B MPD-CHK-B
TB3
CAB034 CHOKE B BLK
04.20 L1 (REACTOR 2-SERVO B)/03.29 L1 U L1
8
L1
9

L2 L2 WHT
04.21 L2 (REACTOR 2-SERVO B)/03.30 L2 V
9 7

L3 W L3 L3 RED
04.22 L3 (REACTOR 2-SERVO B)/03.31 10 8

GND GND GND GND GND


GND (REACTOR 2-SERVO B)/03.32 11 19
04.23

MBRK + 4 4 WHT
12 20
04.24
24VDC + 5 5 WHT
24VDC SEE PAGE 05 MBRK -
13 21
0VDC -
04.25
GROUND TO DRAIN
14 22
DRIVE MTR SHD
04.26 TB5
SD B WHT SERVO B WHT SIN + WHT SIN +
SIN + 1 SD B:1/TB5:12
12 3

04.27
SIN - 2 BRN SD B:2/TB5:13 BRN SIN - BRN SIN -
ETHERNET SEE PAGE 06 13 4

04.28 GRN GRN COS + PINK COS +


COS + 3 SD B:3/TB5:14
14 1

04.29 COS - 4 YEL SD B:4/TB5:15 YEL COS - BLK COS -


15 2

04.30 DATA+ 5 GRY SD B:5/TB5:16 GRY DATA+ GRY DATA+


16 5
SB+ 1

DATA- PINK SD B:10/TB5:17 PINK DATA- GRN DATA-


04.31 SB- 2 10
17 6

S1 3 BLU BLU TS YEL TS+


TS 11 SD B:11/TB5:18
04.32 18 11
SC 4

14 RED SD B:14/TB5:19 RED +5VDC


+5VDC N/C 19 N/C
04.33 S2 5

SAFE 7
BLK SD B:7/TB5:20 BLK +9VDC RED +9VDC
+9VDC 20 12
04.34 TORQUE-OFF
WIRING
6 VIOLET SD B:6/TB5:21 VIOLET ECOM BLU ECOM
ECOM 21 13
04.35
JUMPER

GROUND TO 22 YEL
10
04.36 PLUG ENCODER SHD
DRAIN
18
04.37

DRAWN RAR 18/06/26 SHEET


THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY
APPLICATION NOTES PD CHECKED TTN 18/06/28 SIZE
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D RCT 18/06/28

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD POWER JBOX,
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN POWER JBOX SERVO DRIVES A&B
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 04 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
=MPD SKID+PWR TERMINATION JBOX

=MPD SKID+POWER JBOX =MPD SKID+PLC JBOX


QUINT PS QUINT UPS
05.00
D SEE NOTE 1 16 AWG MIN
05.01 (480V) (480V)
TB4 TB12 TB1 24VDC CB1
CAB010 BLK TB1:1/Q PS:L1(+) L1 (+) + QPS (+)/QUPS (+) + + QUPS (+)/TB2:1 TB2:1/CB1:1 CB1:2/TB2:1
05.02 L1 (CB8 - TB4:1)/03.33 1 1 1 6 CB1:2-TB2:1/08.00
4C#16 1 2
+ AMP CB2
3 GND
WHT TB1:2/Q PS:L2 L2 + TB2:2/CB2:1 CB2:2/TB10:1
05.03 L2 (CB8 - TB4:2)/03.34 2 2 2 6
1 2
AMP CB3
3 GND
RED TB1:3/Q PS:L3(-) L3 (-) - QPS (-)/QUPS (-) - - QUPS (-)/TB3:1 TB2:3/CB3:1 CB3:2/TB10:3
05.04 L3 (CB8 - TB4:3)/03.35 3 3 3 6
1 2
- AMP
3 GND
4 GRN 4 TB1:4/Q PS:GND GND -
05.05 GND (CB8 - TB4:4)/03.36

13 QPS:13/PLC2:00 06.02
05.06 00 IN R26S2
TB1 JUMPER/07.00
POWER SUPPLY OK QUPS:14/PLC2:01 06.02
14
01 IN R26S2
14
05.07
UPS ALARM

24 QUPS:24/PLC2:02 06.02
05.08 02 IN R26S2

1
3/TB3:
BATTERY
UPS BATTERY MODE
QUPS-BATTERY (+) +
05.09 QUPS:34/PLC2:03

2
34 06.02

3/TB3:
03 IN R26S2

CB1:
QUPS-BATTERY (-) -
UPS BATTERY CHARGE
05.10

3
3/TB3:
CB2:
05.11

CB3:
05.12

Q PS:14/TB2:2
05.13

05.14

05.15
TB3 0VDC
UPS BATTERY QUPS (-)/TB3:1
05.16 1

TB3:2/TB10:2
05.17 2

+ TB3:3/TB10:4
05.18 3

-
05.19
TB3 0VDC/07.01

05.20

05.21

05.22

05.23

05.24

05.25

05.26

05.27
SERVO DRIVE A TB3 TB10
CAB013 BLK CB2:2/TB10:1
05.28 (24V+) 1 15 1
10C#16
04.00
06.09 WHT TB3:2/TB10:2
05.29 (0V-) 2 16 2

RED CB3:2/TB10:3
05.30 (24V+) 1 17 3
06.14
04.19 GRN TB3:3/TB10:4
05.31 (0V-) 2 18 4
SERVO DRIVE B
ORG
05.32 19 5

BLU
05.33 20 6

WHT/BLK
05.34 21 7

RED/BLK
05.35 22 8

GRN/BLK
05.36 23 9

NOTES:
ORG/BLK D
1. DO NOT USE THIS SCHEMATIC FOR MPD-001 & MPD-002 (SEE ES10136)
05.37 24 10

DRAWN RAR 18/06/26 SHEET


THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY
APPLICATION NOTES PD CHECKED TTN 18/06/28 SIZE
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D RCT 18/06/28

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD PLC JBOX,
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN PLC JBOX POWER DISTRIBUTION
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 05 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
=MPD SKID+PLC JBOX

=CONTROL SYSTEM CAB19 ETHERNET R26S1 R26S2 R26S3 R26S4 R26S5 R26S6
06.00 D
ADAPTER 1734-IB8 5069-IB16 5069-OB16 5069-IF8 5069-IF8 5069-IF8
RACK: 1 RACK: 1 RACK: 1 RACK: 1 RACK: 1 RACK: 1
CONTROL SYSTEM
06.01 SLOT: 1 SLOT: 2 SLOT: 3 SLOT: 4 SLOT: 5 SLOT: 6
CAB020 ETHERNET
OK DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL OUTPUT

06.02 0 00 07.05 0 00 05.06 0 00 07.09 00 0+ 08.02 00 0+ 08.40 00 0+ 0914


NET
CHOKE VALVE A IN (OPEN) POWER SUPPLY OK CHOKE VALVE A IN (CLOSE) MANIFOLD PRESS (IN) MPD CHOKE B FLOW (IN) BOP RCD
ETAP MPD PRESSURE 1
06.03 LINK 1 1 01 07.06 1 01 05.07 1 01 07.11 01 0- 08.03 01 0- 08.41 01 0- 0916
N10878
CHOKE VALVE A IN (CLOSE) UPS ALARM CHOKE VALVE A IN (OPEN) 0VDC - 0VDC - 0VDC -
LINK 2

ey ETAP
OK
06.04 2 02 07.08 2 02 05.08 2 02 07.27 02 1+ 08.07 02 1+ 08.45 02 1+ 0920
LINK 1 CHOKE VALVE A IN (OK) UPS BATTERY MODE CHOKE VALVE A OUT (CLOSE) MANIFOLD PRESS (OUT) MPD CHOKE B FLOW (OUT) MPD RCD DP

en- Bradl
LINK 2 DENSITY OUT
06.05 3 03 07.23 3 03 05.09 3 03 07.29 03 1- 08.08 03 1- 08.46 03 1- 0922
DEVICE
CHOKE VALVE A OUT (OPEN) UPS BATTERY CHARGE CHOKE VALVE A OUT (OPEN) 0VDC - 0VDC - 0VDC -
PORT

l
Al
06.06 4 04 07.24 4 04 4 04 07.59 04 2+ 08.11 04 2+ 08.49 04 2+ 0924

CHOKE VALVE A OUT (CLOSE) SPARE CHOKE VALVE B IN (CLOSE) CHOKE A PRESS (IN) MPD TEMP (IN) WELLHEAD RETURN
PRESSURE
06.07 5 05 07.26 5 05 5 05 07.61 05 2- 08.12 05 2- 08.50 05 2- 0926
(DP) SPARE
CHOKE VALVE A OUT (OK) SPARE CHOKE VALVE B IN (OPEN) 0VDC - 0VDC - 0VDC -
=MPD SKID+POWER JBOX
06.08 6 06 07.55 6 06 6 06 07.77 06 3+ 08.16 06 3+ 08.54 06 3+ 0929
SERVO DRIVE A CHOKE VALVE B IN (OPEN) SPARE CHOKE VALVE B OUT (CLOSE) CHOKE A PRESS (OUT) MPD TEMP (OUT) STAND PIPE PRESSURE 1
CAB011
06.09 ETHERNET 7 07 07.56 7 07 7 07 07.79 07 3- 08.17 07 3- 08.55 07 3- 0932

CHOKE VALVE B IN (CLOSE) SPARE CHOKE VALVE B OUT (OPEN) 0VDC - 0VDC - 0VDC -

06.10 (FRONT) D 8 08 07.58 8 08 8 08 07.94 08 4+ 08.20 08 4+ 08.58 08 4+ 1002

CHOKE VALVE B IN (OK) SPARE BYPASS VALVE (CLOSE) CHOKE A FLOW (IN) MPD MANIFOLD FLOW IN SPARE

06.11
CAB011A
ETHERNET
CB012 ETHERNET
9 09 07.73 9 09 9 09 07.95 09 4- 08.21 09 4- 08.59 09 4- 1004
(GRAY OR BLACK)
5069-AENTR CHOKE VALVE B OUT (OPEN) SPARE BYPASS VALVE (OPEN) 0VDC - 0VDC - 0VDC -
(REAR)

06.12 MOD POWER 10 10 07.74 10 10 10 10 10 5+ 08.25 10 5+ 08.63 10 5+ 1010


0VDC TB3:16(0VDC)/08.65
CHOKE VALVE B OUT (CLOSE) SPARE SPARE CHOKE A FLOW (OUT) STAND PIPE PRESSURE 2 SPARE
TB2:8 (24VDC)/08.71 SA POWER
06.13 +24VDC 11 11 07.76 11 11 11 11 11 5- 08.26 11 5- 08.64 11 5- 1012

CHOKE VALVE B OUT (OK) SPARE SPARE 0VDC - 0VDC - 0VDC -


SERVO DRIVE B
06.14 TB2:9 (24VDC)/08.72 + 12 12 07.89 12 12 12 12 12 6+ 08.29 12 6+ 0902 12 6+ 1018

BYPASS VALVE (OPEN) SPARE SPARE CHOKE B PRESS (IN) STAND PIPE PRESSURE 3 SPARE

06.15 TB3:17(0VDC)/08.66 - 13 13 07.91 13 13 13 13 13 6- 08.30 13 6- 0906 13 6- 1020

BYPASS VALVE (CLOSE) SPARE SPARE 0VDC - 0VDC - 0VDC -

06.16 +/L 14 14 07.92 14 14 14 14 14 7+ 08.34 14 7+ 0910 14 7+ 1026

BYPASS VALVE (OK) SPARE SPARE CHOKE B PRESS (OUT) MPD STAND PIPE SPARE
DP DENSITY IN
06.17 -/N 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 7- 08.35 15 7- 0911 15 7- 1028

SPARE SPARE SPARE 0VDC - 0VDC - 0VDC -

06.18 GND 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 SHD 16 SHD 16 SHD


COMPACT I/O
D N/C N/C LA+ SHD SHD SHD

06.19 CAB012 ETHERNET (GREEN) 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 SHD 17 SHD 17 SHD

N/C N/C LA- SHD N11387 SHD N11387 SHD N11387


N10612 N11385 N11389 CURRENT/VOLTAGE INPUT CURRENT/VOLTAGE INPUT CURRENT/VOLTAGE INPUT
06.20

06.21

06.22

06.23

06.24

06.25

TB2:10/PLC3:16
06.26 TB2:10 (24VDC)/08.73

06.27

TB3:18/PLC3:17
06.28 TB3:18(0VDC)/08.67

06.29

06.30

06.31

06.32

06.33

06.34

06.35

06.36

06.37

DRAWN RAR 18/06/26 SHEET


THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY
APPLICATION NOTES PD CHECKED TTN 18/06/28 SIZE
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D RCT 18/06/28

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD PLC JBOX,
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN PLC JBOX PLC & ETHERNET
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 06 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
MPD-GV-A =MPD SKID+PLC JBOX MPD-GV-B
=MPD SKID+PLC JBOX TB1 JUMPER/07.32
TB1 JUMPER/05.06 LEG A IN (UPSTREAM) =GATE VALVE B LEG B IN (UPSTREAM)
07.00 07.50 TB3 JUMPER/07.33
TB3 0VDC/05.19 =GATE VALVE A
CB4 CB6
07.01 TB1 24VDC TB4
CAB014/GV-A
TB1 TB1 TB1 07.51 TB1 24VDC TB6
CAB016/GV-B
TB1 TB1 TB1
CB4:1/TB1:4 CB4:2/TB4:1 BLK CB6:1/TB1:6 CB6:2/TB6:1 BLK
4 6 1 6 9 42 6 6 1 6 9 42
1 2 10C#16 1 2 10C#16
AMP AMP
07.02 TB3 0VDC 3 GND 07.52 TB3 0VDC 3 GND
CB4:3/TB3:4 CB6:3/TB3:6
4 6
WHT WHT
07.03 2 36 07.53 2 36
TB4:2/TB3:4 TB6:2/TB3:7

07.04 RED
07.54 RED
06.02 TB4:3/PLC1:00 06.02 TB6:3/PLC1:06
R26S1 IN 00 3 8 R26S1 IN 06 3 8

07.05 CHOKE VALVE A IN (OPEN) 07.55 CHOKE VALVE B IN (OPEN)

06.02 TB4:4/PLC1:01 GRN 06.02 TB6:4/PLC1:07 GRN


07.06 R26S1 IN 01 4 7 07.56 R26S1 IN 07 4 7

CHOKE VALVE A IN (CLOSE) CHOKE VALVE B IN (CLOSE)

07.07 07.57
06.02 TB4:5/PLC1:02 ORG 06.02 TB6:5/PLC1:08 ORG
R26S1 IN 02 5 44 R26S1 IN 08 5 44

07.08 CHOKE VALVE A IN (OK) 07.58 CHOKE VALVE B IN (OK)

06.02 TB4:6/PLC3:00 BLU 06.02 TB6:6/PLC3:04 BLU


07.09 R26S3 OUT 00 6 33 07.59 R26S3 OUT 04 6 33

CHOKE VALVE A IN (CLOSE) CHOKE VALVE B IN (CLOSE)

07.10 07.60
06.02 TB4:7/PLC3:01 WHT/BLK 06.02 TB6:7/PLC3:05 WHT/BLK
R26S3 OUT 01 7 35 R26S3 OUT 05 7 35

07.11 CHOKE VALVE A IN (OPEN) 07.61 CHOKE VALVE B IN (OPEN)

RED/BLK RED/BLK
8 30 8 30
07.12 07.62
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
07.13 9 46 07.63 9 46

07.14 10
ORG/BLK
47
07.64 10
ORG/BLK
47

07.15 07.65

07.16 07.66

07.17 MPD-GV-C 07.67 MPD-GV-D

LEG A OUT (DOWNSTREAM) =GATE VALVE D LEG B OUT (DOWNSTREAM)


07.18 07.68
=GATE VALVE C
CB5 CB7
07.19 TB1 24VDC TB5
CAB015/GV-C BLK
TB1 TB1 TB1 07.69 TB1 24VDC TB7
CAB017/GV-D BLK
TB1 TB1 TB1
CB5:1/TB1:5 CB5:2/TB5:1 CB7:1/TB1:7 CB7:2/TB7:1
5 6 1 6 9 42 7 6 1 6 9 42
1 2 10C#16 1 2 10C#16
AMP AMP
07.20 TB3 0VDC 3 GND 07.70 TB3 0VDC 3 GND
CB5:3/TB3:5 DB7:3/TB3:7
5 7
WHT WHT
07.21 2 36 07.71 2 36
TB5:2/TB3:5 TB7:2/TB3:7

07.22 RED
07.72 RED
06.02 TB5:3/PLC1:03 06.02 TB7:3/PLC1:09
R26S1 IN 03 3 8 R26S1 IN 09 3 8

07.23 CHOKE VALVE A OUT (OPEN) 07.73 CHOKE VALVE B OUT (OPEN)

06.02 TB5:4/PLC1:04 GRN 06.02 TB7:4/PLC1:10 GRN


07.24 R26S1 IN 04 4 7 07.74 R26S1 IN 10 4 7

CHOKE VALVE A OUT (CLOSE) CHOKE VALVE B OUT (CLOSE)

07.25 ORG
07.75 ORG
06.02 TB5:5/PLC1:05 06.02 TB7:5/PLC1:11
R26S1 IN 05 5 44 R26S1 IN 11 5 44

07.26 CHOKE VALVE A OUT (OK) 07.76 CHOKE VALVE B OUT (OK)

06.02 TB5:6/PLC3:02 BLU 06.02 TB7:6/PLC3:06 BLU


07.27 R26S3 OUT 02 6 33 07.77 R26S3 OUT 06 6 33

CHOKE VALVE A OUT (CLOSE) CHOKE VALVE B OUT (CLOSE)

07.28 WHT/BLK
07.78 WHT/BLK
06.02 TB5:7/PLC3:03 06.02 TB7:7/PLC3:07
R26S3 OUT 03 7 35 R26S3 OUT 07 7 35

07.29 CHOKE VALVE A OUT (OPEN) 07.79 CHOKE VALVE B OUT (OPEN)

RED/BLK RED/BLK
8 30 8 30
07.30 07.80
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
0731 9 46 07.81 9 46

TB1 JUMPER/07.50
07.32 10
ORG/BLK
47
07.82 10
ORG/BLK
47
TB3 JUMPER/07.51
07.33 07.83
MPD-GV-E
07.34 07.84 =GATE VALVE E
GUTLINE

07.35 07.85
CB8
TB1 24VDC TB8 TB1 TB1 TB1
CAB018/GV-E BLK
CB8:1/TB1:8 CB8:2/TB8:1
0736 07.86 8
1
6
2
1
10C#16
6 9 42
AMP
TB3 0VDC 3 GND
CB8:3/TB3:8
07.37 07.87 8
WHT
2 36
TB8:2/TB3:8
07.38 07.88
06.02 TB8:3/PLC1:12 RED
07.39 07.89 R26S1 IN 12 3 8

BYPASS VALVE (OPEN)

07.40 07.90 GRN


06.02 TB8:4/PLC1:13
R26S1 IN 13 4 7

07.41 07.91 BYPASS VALVE (CLOSE)

06.02 TB8:5/PLC1:14 ORG


07.42 07.92 R26S1 IN 14 5 44

BYPASS VALVE (OK)

07.43 07.93 BLU


06.02 TB8:6/PLC3:08
R26S3 OUT 08 6 33

07.44 07.94 BYPASS VALVE (CLOSE)

06.02 TB8:7/PLC3:09 WHT/BLK


07.45 07.95 R26S3 OUT 09 7 35

BYPASS VALVE (OPEN)

07.46 07.96 8
RED/BLK
30

TB3 JUMPER/08.01
07.47 07.97
GRN/BLK
9 46

07.48 07.98
ORG/BLK
10 47
07.49 07.99

DRAWN RAR 18/06/26 SHEET


THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL APPLICATION NOTES PD SIZE
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY CHECKED TTN 18/06/28
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D RCT 18/06/28

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD PLC JBOX,
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN PLC JBOX VALVE CONNECTIONS
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD.CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 07 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
=MPD SKID+PLC JBOX =MPD SKID+PLC JBOX
CB1:2-TB2:1/05.02

08.00 08.38 TB2 JUMPER/08.37


TB3 JUMPER/07.97
BR1 TB3 JUMPER/08.36 BR5
CHK-PIT-001 CHK-B-FIT-001
08.01 Output Intput TB9 1 08.39 Output Intput TB9 9
CAB021/GP IN 02.02 CAB029/FB IN 02.18
06.02 BR1:1/PLC4:00 BR1:12/TB9:1 BLU 06.02 BR5:1/PLC5:00 BR5:12/TB9:9 BLU
+ +
R26S4 0+ 00 1 (+) 12 R26S5 0+ 00 1 (+) 12
BR1:10/TB9:1 CLR - BR5:10/TB9:9 CLR -
08.02 MANIFOLD PRESS (IN) 08.40 MPD CHOKE B FLOW (IN)
06.02 BR1:2/PLC4:01 SHD 06.02 BR5:2/PLC5:01 SHD
GND GND
R26S4 0- 01 2 (-) 11 R26S5 0- 01 2 (-) 11

08.03 0VDC - 08.41 0VDC -


(-) 10
CHOKE MANIFOLD (-) 10
CHOKE B
TB2 24VDC CHANNEL1 IE GND PRESS IN TB2 24VDC CHANNEL1 IE GND FLOW IN
08.04 BR1:7/TB2:1 08.42 BR5:7/TB2:5
1 7 + BUSS 5 7 + BUSS

24VDC

24VDC
TB3 0VDC TB3 0VDC
08.05 BR1:9/TB3:9 08.43 BR5:9/TB3:13
9 9 - 13 9 -

CHANNEL 2 CHK-PIT-002 CHANNEL 2 CHK-B-FIT-002


08.06 TB9 2 02.04
08.44 TB9 10 02.20
CAB022/GP OUT BLU CAB030/FB OUT BLU
06.02 BR1:5/PLC4:02 BR1:13/TB9:2 + 06.02 BR5:5/PLC5:02 BR5:13/TB9:10 +
R26S4 1+ 02 5 (+) 13 R26S5 1+ 02 5 (+) 13
BR1:14/TB9:2 CLR BR5:14/TB9:10 CLR
- -
08.07 MANIFOLD PRESS (OUT) 08.45 MPD CHOKE B FLOW (OUT)
06.02 BR1:6/PLC4:03 SHD 06.02 BR5:6/PLC5:03 SHD
GND GND
R26S4 1- 03 6 (-) 14 R26S5 1- 03 6 (-) 14

08.08 0VDC - 08.46 0VDC -


(-) 15
CHOKE MANIFOLD (-) 15
CHOKE B
IE GND IE GND
PRESS OUT FLOW OUT
08.09 BUSS 08.47 BUSS
BR2 BR6
CHK-A-PIT-001 CHK-TT-001
08.10 Output Intput TB9 3 08.48 Output Intput TB9 11
CAB023/PA IN 02.06 02.22
06.02 BR2:1/PLC4:04 BR2:12/TB9:3 BLU + 06.02 BR6:1/PLC5:04 BR6:12/TB9:11 CAB031/T IN BLU +
R26S4 2+ 04 1 (+) 12 R26S5 2+ 04 1 (+) 12
BR2:10/TB9:3 CLR BR6:10/TB9:11 CLR
- -
08.11 CHOKE A PRESS (IN) 08.49 MPD TEMP (IN)
06.02 BR2:2/PLC4:05 SHD 06.02 BR6:2/PLC5:05 SHD
GND GND
R26S4 2- 05 2 (-) 11 R26S5 2- 05 2 (-) 11

08.12 0VDC - 08.50 0VDC -


(-) 10
CHOKE A (-) 10
TEMPERATURE
TB2 24VDC CHANNEL1 IE GND PRESSURE IN TB2 24VDC CHANNEL1 IE GND IN
08.13 BR2:7/TB2:2 08.51 BR6:7/TB2:6
2 7 + BUSS 6 7 + BUSS

24VDC

24VDC
TB3 0VDC TB3 0VDC
08.14 BR2:9/TB3:10 08.52 BR6:9/TB3:14
10 9 - 14 9 -

CHANNEL 2 CHK-A-PIT-002 CHANNEL 2 CHK-TT-002


08.15 TB9 4 02.08 08.53 TB9 12 02.24
CAB024/PA OUT BLU CAB032/T OUT BLU
06.02 BR2:5/PLC4:07 BR2:13/TB9:4 + 06.02 BR6:5/PLC5:06 BR6:13/TB9:12 +
R26S4 3+ 06 5 (+) 13 R26S5 3+ 06 5 (+) 13
BR2:14/TB9:4 CLR BR6:14/TB9:12 CLR
- -
08.16 CHOKE A PRESS (OUT) 08.54 MPD TEMP (OUT)
06.02 BR2:6/PLC4:06 SHD 06.02 BR6:6/PLC5:07 SHD
GND GND
R26S4 3- 07 6 (-) 14 R26S5 3- 07 6 (-) 14

08.17 0VDC - 08.55 0VDC -


(-) 15
CHOKE A (-) 15
TEMPERATURE
IE GND
IE GND PRESSURE OUT OUT
08.18 08.56 BUSS
BUSS
BR3 BR7
CHK-A-FIT-001 CHK-FIT-001
08.19 Output Intput TB9 5 08.57 Output Intput TB9 13
CAB025/FA IN 02.10 CAB033 02.26
06.02 BR3:1/PLC4:08 BR3:12/TB9:5 BLU 06.02 BR7:1/PLC5:08 BR7:12/TB9:13 BLU
+ +
R26S4 4+ 08 1 (+) 12 R26S5 4+ 08 1 (+) 12
BR3:10/TB9:5 CLR BR7:10/TB9:13 CLR
- -
08.20 CHOKE A FLOW (IN) 08.58 MPD MANIFOLD FLOW IN
06.02 BR3:2/PLC4:09 SHD 06.02 BR7:2/PLC5:09 SHD
GND GND
R26S4 4- 09 2 (-) 11 R26S5 4- 09 2 (-) 11

08.21 0VDC - 08.59 0VDC -


(-) 10
CHOKE A (-) 10
MANIFOLD FLOW IN
TB2 24VDC CHANNEL1 FLOW IN TB2 24VDC CHANNEL1 IE GND
08.22 BR3:7/TB2:3 IE GND 08.60 BR7:7/TB2:7
3 7 + 7 7 + BUSS
24VDC

24VDC
BUSS
TB3 0VDC TB3 0VDC
08.23 BR3:9/TB3:11 08.61 BR7:9/TB3:15 D
11 9 - 15 9 -

CHANNEL 2 CHK-A-FIT-002 CHANNEL 2


08.24 TB9 6 02.12
08.62 TB9 14
CAB026/FA OUT BLU
06.02 BR3:5/PLC4:10 BR3:13/TB9:6 + 06.02 BR7:5/PLC5:10 BR7:13/TB9:14
R26S4 5+ 10 5 (+) 13 R26S5 5+ 10 5 (+) 13 CABLE 531 RED/0902
BR3:14/TB9:6 CLR BR7:14/TB9:14
-
08.25 CHOKE A FLOW (OUT) 08.63 STAND PIPE PRESSURE 2 CABLE 531 WHT/0902
06.02 BR3:6/PLC4:11 SHD 06.02 BR7:6/PLC5:11
GND
R26S4 5- 11 6 (-) 14 R26S5 5- 11 6 (-) 14

08.26 0VDC - 08.64 0VDC -


(-) 15
CHOKE A (-) 15
IE GND
FLOW OUT TB3 0VDC
08.27 BUSS 08.65 TB3:16/ENTHE DC(-)
16 TB3:16(0VDC)/06.12
BR4
CHK-B-PIT-001
08.28 Output Intput TB9 7 08.66 TB3:17/PLC DC (-)
CAB027/PB IN 02.14
06.02 BR4:1/PLC4:12 BR4:12/TB9:7 BLU 17 TB3:17(0VDC)/06.15
+
R26S4 6+ 12 1 (+) 12
BR4:10/TB9:7 CLR
-
08.29 CHOKE B PRESS (IN) 08.67 TB3:18/PLC3:17
06.02 BR4:2/PLC4:13 SHD GND
18 TB3:18(0VDC)/06.28
R26S4 6- 13 2 (-) 11

08.30 0VDC - 08.68


(-) 10
CHOKE B
TB2 24VDC CHANNEL1 IE GND PRESSURE IN TB3 JUMPER/0905
08.31 BR4:7/TB2:4 08.69
4 7 + BUSS
24VDC

TB3 0VDC
08.32 BR4:9/TB3:12 08.70 TB2 24VDC
12 9 - TB2:8/ENTHE DC (+)
8 TB2:8 (24VDC)/06.13
CHANNEL 2 CHK-B-PIT-002
08.33 TB9 8 02.16
08.71
CAB028/PB OUT BLU
06.02 BR4:5/PLC4:14 BR4:13/TB9:8 + TB2:9/PLC DC (+)
R26S4 7+ 14 5 (+) 13 9 TB2:9 (24VDC)/06.14
BR4:14/TB9:8 CLR
-
08.34 CHOKE B PRESS (OUT) 08.72
06.02 BR4:6/PLC4:15 SHD GND TB2:10/PLC3:16
R26S4 7- 15 6 (-) 14 10 TB2:10 (24VDC)/06.26

08.35 0VDC - 08.73


(-) 15
CHOKE B
IE GND PRESSURE OUT
08.36 TB3 JUMPER/08.39 08.74 TB2 JUMPER/0904
BUSS
TB2 JUMPER/08.38
08.37 08.75

DRAWN RAR 18/06/26 SHEET


THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY
APPLICATION NOTES PD CHECKED TTN 18/06/28 SIZE
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D RCT 18/06/28

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD PLC JBOX,
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN PLC JBOX SENSOR CONNECTIONS
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 08 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
=RIG+OFF SKID
D =RIG SUB SKID+OFF-SKID TERMINAL JBOX
=MPD SKID+PLC JBOX
TB2 R513A PL513A CAB513A R513B PL513B CAB513B SP-PIT-002A
CAB513 BLK BLK BLK
2:1.2
0900 1 02.32
2:1.2 GRN A A GRN A A GRN
GND D
2
ORG D D ORG D D ORG
0901 CAB531B CAB531A CAB531 3
R531A PL531A R531 PL531 TB1 1 E E E E
RED RED RED RED RED RED
CABLE 531 RED/08.63 1 (+) SENSOR
0902 06.02 WHT C A WHT C A WHT WHT B B WHT B B WHT
R26S5 6+ 12 CABLE 531 WHT/08.63 2 (-) SENSOR
SHLD B B SHLD B B SHLD SHD C C SHD C C SHD
STAND PIPE PRESSURE 3 3
0903 IE GND A C A C F F F F
1
TB2 JUMPER/08.74 D BUSS

0904 BR8
TB3 JUMPER/08.69 D
Output Intput TB9 15 TB1 R514A PL514A CAB514A R514B PL514B CAB514B SP-PIT-003A
GRN GRN GRN CAB514 RED RED RED
BR8:1/PLC5:12 BR8:12/TB9:15
0905 1 (+) 12 4 (+) SENSOR 02.34
BR8:10/TB9:15 ORG D D ORG D D ORG WHT B B WHT B B WHT
5 (-) SENSOR
BR8:2/PLC5:13 E E E E SHD C C SHD C C SHD
06.02
0906 R26S5 6- 13 2 (-) 11 6
F F F F
0VDC - 2
(-) 10 TB2
0907 BLK BLK BLK
TB2 24VDC CHANNEL1 4
BR8:7/TB2:11 GRN A A GRN A A GRN
GND
11 7 + 5

24VDC
0908 ORG D D ORG D D ORG
TB3 0VDC 6
BR8:9/TB3:19 E E E E
19 9 - 2
0909
06.02 CHANNEL 2
R26S5 7+ 14 TB9 16 TB1 R515A PL515A CAB515A R515B PL515B CAB515B SP-DIT-001
BLU BLU BLU CAB515 RED RED RED
BR8:5/PLC5:14 BR8:13/TB9:16
0910 MPD STAND PIPE 5 (+) 13 7 (+) SENSOR
02.36
BR8:14/TB9:16 WHT/BLK F F WHT/BLK F F WHT/BLK WHT B B WHT B B WHT
DP DENSITY IN
8 (-) SENSOR
BR8:6/PLC5:15 G G G G SHD C C SHD C C SHD
06.02
0911 R26S5 7- 15 6 (-) 14 9
F F F F
0VDC - 3
(-) 15 TB2
0912 BLK BLK BLK
7
GRN A A GRN A A GRN
GND
8
0913 ORG D D ORG D D ORG
06.02 9
R26S6 0+ 00 E E E E
BR9 3
0914 BOP RCD
Output Intput TB9 17 TB1 R516A PL516A CAB516A R516B PL516B CAB516B RCD-PIT-001
PRESSURE 1 CAB516
BR9:1/PLC6:00 BR9:12/TB9:17 RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK RED RED RED
1 (+) 12 10 (+) SENSOR 02.38
0915 BR9:10/TB9:17 GRN/BLK H H GRN/BLK H H GRN/BLK WHT B B WHT B B WHT
11 (-) SENSOR
BR9:2/PLC6:01 J J J J SHD C C SHD C C SHD
06.02
R26S6 0- 01 2 (-) 11 12
0916 F F F F
0VDC - 4
(-) 10 TB2
BLK BLK BLK
0917 TB2 24VDC CHANNEL1 10
BR9:7/TB2:12 GRN A A GRN A A GRN
GND
12 7 + 11
24VDC

ORG D D ORG D D ORG


0918 TB3 0VDC 12
BR9:9/TB3:20 E E E E
20 9 - 4

0919 CHANNEL 2
TB9 18 TB1 R517A PL517A CAB517A R517B PL517B CAB517B CHK-DIT-001
ORG/BLK ORG/BLK ORG/BLK CAB517 RED RED RED
06.02 BR9:5/PLC6:02 BR9:13/TB9:18 (+) SENSOR
R26S6 1+ 02 5 (+) 13 13
02.40
0920 BR9:14/TB9:18 BLU/BLK K K BLU/BLK K K BLU/BLK WHT B B WHT B B WHT (-) SENSOR
MPD RCD DP 14
BR9:7/PLC6:03 L L L L SHD C C SHD C C SHD
DENSITY OUT
6 (-) 14 15
0921 F F F F
06.02 5 TB2
R26S6 1- 03 (-) 15 BLK BLK BLK
13
0922 0VDC - GRN A A GRN A A GRN
GND
14
ORG D D ORG D D ORG
15
0923 E E E E
BR10 5
Output Intput TB9 19 TB1 R518A PL518A CAB518A R518B PL518B CAB518B WH-PIT-001
0924 BLK/WHT BLK/WHT BLK/WHT CAB518 RED RED RED
06.02 BR10:1/PLC6:04 BR10:12/TB9:19 (+) SENSOR
R26S6 2+ 04 1 (+) 12 16
M M B B 02.42
BR10:10/TB9:19 RED/WHT M RED/WHT M RED/WHT WHT B WHT B WHT
(-) SENSOR
WELLHEAD RETURN 17
0925 PRESSURE BR10:2/PLC6:05 N N N N SHD C C SHD C C SHD
2 (-) 11 18
F F F F
06.02 6 (OPTIONAL)
0926 R26S6 2- 05 (-) 10 TB2
BLK BLK BLK
TB2 24VDC 0VDC - CHANNEL1 16
BR10:7/TB2:13 GRN A A GRN A A GRN D
GND
0927 13 7 + 17
24VDC

ORG D D ORG D D ORG


TB3 0VDC 18
BR10:9/TB3:21 E E E E
0928 21 9 - 6

CHANNEL 2 D
TB9 20 TB1 R519A PL519A CAB519A R519B PL519B CAB519B SP-PIT-001
0929 GRN/WHT GRN/WHT GRN/WHT CAB519 RED RED RED
06.02 BR10:5/PLC6:06 BR10:13/TB9:20 (+) SENSOR
R26S6 3+ 06 5 (+) 13 19 0244
BR10:14/TB9:20 BLU/WHT P P BLU/WHT P P BLU/WHT WHT B B WHT B B WHT
(-) SENSOR
STAND PIPE PRESSURE 1 20
0930 BR10:6/PLC6:07 R R R R SHD C C SHD C C SHD
6 (-) 14 21
F F F F
7
0931 (-) 15 TB2
RED/GRN BLK BLK BLK
RED/GRN NC 19
06.02 NC ORG/GRN GRN A A GRN A A GRN
GND
0932 R26S6 3- 07 ORG/GRN NC 20
IE GND NC ORG D D ORG D D ORG
0VDC - BUSS 21
TB1 E E E E
0933 BLK/RED BLK/RED BLK/RED 7
22
WHT/RED S S WHT/RED S S WHT/RED
IE GND 23
0934 BUSS T T T T
24
8
0935 TB2
22
ORG/RED ORG/RED ORG/RED
0936 23
BLU/RED U U BLU/RED U U BLU/RED
IE GND 24
BUSS V V V V
0937 8

DRAWN RAR 18/06/26 SHEET


THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY
APPLICATION NOTES PD CHECKED TTN 18/06/28 SIZE
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D RCT 18/06/28

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD PLC JBOX,
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN PLC JBOX SENSOR CONNECTIONS
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 09 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
=MPD SKID+PLC JBOX

1000

1001

06.02
1002 R26S6 4+ 08
SPARE

1003

06.02
1004 R26S6 4- 09
0VDC -

1005

1006

1007

1008

1009
06.02
R26S6 5+ 10
1010
SPARE

1011
06.02
R26S6 5- 11
1012
0VDC -

1013

1014

1015

1016

1017
06.02
R26S6 6+ 12
1018
SPARE

1019
06.02
R26S6 6- 13
1020
0VDC -

1021

1022

1023

1024

1025
06.02
R26S6 7+ 14
1026
SPARE

1027
06.02
R26S6 7- 15
1028
0VDC -

1029

1030

1031

1032

1033

1034

1035

1036

1037

DRAWN CMS 18/12/14 SHEET


THIS PRINT AND DESIGN AND DETAIL
SHOWN THEREON ARE THE PROPERTY
APPLICATION NOTES PD CHECKED
SIZE
A 18-06-26 RAR INITIAL RELEASED TTN / RCT
AND INVENTION OF CANRIG DRILLING APPRV'D

B 18-10-23 CMS ECR4721, REDO PG 2, UPDATED PG 6, ADDED PG 9-10 TTN / RKN


TECHNOLOGY LTD.. THIS PRINT IS
INSTALLATION D
FURNISHED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING
MPD SKID
C 19-09-10 CMS ADDED ETAP REPLACING STRATIX SWITCH TTN / RCT THAT IT IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED MPD PLC JBOX
WITHOUT PERMISSION AND RETURNED LOCATION
D 19-10-08 TTN ECN3258 UPON DEMAND. ALL RIGHTS OF DESIGN PLC JBOX SLOT 6 SPARE IO POINTS
AND INVENTION ARE RESERVED BY SN# PROJECT
No. YY/MM/DD BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. No. YY/MM/DD
CHKD./ BY REVISION CHKD. APVD. CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD..
CHKD./ ES10150 10 REV:D
191010 MPD-003 & UP
7
Certifications

Nabors Drilling Technologies USA, Inc. 7-1


MPD-READY® Product Manual

This page is left blank to properly sequence this document.

7-2 Document ID 18-006 v 3.0


MPD-READY

DATA BOOK

CANDOC MPD MANUAL COPYRIGHT © 2016 CANRIG DRILLING TECHNOLOGY LTD.


S/N MPD-005 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Canrig Drilling Technology Ltd.

Printed in the United States of America


CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE
MPD-READY ®

SERIAL NUMBER: MPD-005

The MPD And Related Equipment Has Been Manufactured and Tested In Accordance With
Canrig Quality Acceptance Standards: API Q1 And Is Certified To
Meet Industry Requirements For Drilling Equipment.

Date: 05/23/2019 Issued By Canrig Drilling Technology Ltd.

Signature 3 Signature 4

You might also like